Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural,

and Electrical Works for

Rehabilitation of Admin Building
in Fishery Harbor
Contents
1. General Specifications.................................................................................................................11
1.1 General Requirements:........................................................................................................11
1.1.1 Quantities..........................................................................................................................
1.1.2 Drawings............................................................................................................................
1.1.3 Unit Rate:...........................................................................................................................
1.1.4 Testing:..............................................................................................................................
1.1.5 Reference:..........................................................................................................................
1.2 Project Management and Coordination..............................................................................12
1.2.1 Coordination......................................................................................................................
1.2.2 Requests for Information (RFIs).........................................................................................
1.2.3 Project Meetings................................................................................................................
1.3 PRELIMINARIES....................................................................................................................17
1.3.1 Pre-Construction work:......................................................................................................
1.3.2 Adjoining property.............................................................................................................
1.3.3 Project signboards.............................................................................................................
1.4 General Contractor’s Obligations:........................................................................................19
1.5 Completion Of the Works....................................................................................................20
1.5.1 General..............................................................................................................................
1.5.2 Issuing Taking Over Certificate...........................................................................................
1.5.3 List of Incomplete Items Snagging List...............................................................................
1.5.4 Final cleaning.....................................................................................................................
1.5.5 Post construction Works....................................................................................................
2. Site Preparation...........................................................................................................................22
2.1 GENERAL..............................................................................................................................22
2.2 Work Included:....................................................................................................................22
2.3 Regulatory Requirements:...................................................................................................22
2.4 Execution:............................................................................................................................22
2.4.1 Inspection..........................................................................................................................
2.4.2 Construction......................................................................................................................
2.4.3 Protection of Adjacent Areas.............................................................................................
2.4.4 Disposal..............................................................................................................................
3. Demolitions.................................................................................................................................24

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

2
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3.1 GENERAL..............................................................................................................................24
3.2 References:..........................................................................................................................24
3.3 Interpretation......................................................................................................................24
3.4 Submittals:...........................................................................................................................24
3.5 Field Conditions:..................................................................................................................24
3.6 Products:..............................................................................................................................25
3.7 Execution:............................................................................................................................25
3.7.1 Examination:......................................................................................................................
3.7.2 Preparation & Protection...................................................................................................
3.7.3 Selective Demolition, General:...........................................................................................
3.7.4 Disposal of Demolished Materials......................................................................................
3.7.5 Cleaning.............................................................................................................................
4. Concrete Forming and Accessories:.............................................................................................27
4.1 General................................................................................................................................27
4.2 References:..........................................................................................................................28
4.3 Submittals:...........................................................................................................................28
4.4 Quality Control.....................................................................................................................29
4.5 Field Quality Control............................................................................................................29
4.6 Products...............................................................................................................................29
4.6.1 Materials............................................................................................................................
4.7 Executions............................................................................................................................31
4.7.1 Coating...............................................................................................................................
4.7.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................
4.7.3 Preparation........................................................................................................................
4.7.4 Removal.............................................................................................................................
5. Concrete Reinforcing:..................................................................................................................36
5.1 General................................................................................................................................36
5.2 References:..........................................................................................................................36
5.3 Quality Assurance:...............................................................................................................37
5.4 Source Quality Control.........................................................................................................37
5.5 Products...............................................................................................................................37
5.5.1 Materials............................................................................................................................
5.6 Executions............................................................................................................................37
5.6.1 Placement and Fixing of Reinforcement............................................................................
5.6.2 Measurements And Rates..................................................................................................

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

3
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
6. Cast-In-Place Concrete:................................................................................................................39
6.1 General................................................................................................................................39
6.2 References:..........................................................................................................................39
6.3 Submittals:...........................................................................................................................41
6.4 Quality Assurance................................................................................................................42
6.5 Products...............................................................................................................................46
6.5.1 Materials............................................................................................................................
6.5.2 Mixes.................................................................................................................................
6.6 Executions............................................................................................................................52
6.6.1 Mixing Concrete.................................................................................................................
6.6.2 Joints and Embedded Items...............................................................................................
6.6.3 Placing Concrete................................................................................................................
6.6.4 Curing.................................................................................................................................
6.6.5 Striking of Formwork.........................................................................................................
6.6.6 Tolerances..........................................................................................................................
6.6.7 Cleaning Finished Exposed Concrete Surfaces...................................................................
6.6.8 Patching.............................................................................................................................
6.6.9 Schedules - Finishing..........................................................................................................
6.6.10 Lightweight Concrete.........................................................................................................
6.6.11 Topping and roofing Concrete...........................................................................................
7. STONEWORK:...............................................................................................................................57
7.1 General................................................................................................................................57
7.2 References:..........................................................................................................................57
7.3 Submittals:...........................................................................................................................58
7.4 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................59
7.5 Products...............................................................................................................................59
7.6 5.1.1 Stone Materials...........................................................................................................59
7.7 Executions............................................................................................................................60
7.7.1 Conditions at Site...............................................................................................................
7.7.2 Stone Installation...............................................................................................................
8. Blockworks:.................................................................................................................................62
8.1 General................................................................................................................................62
8.2 References:..........................................................................................................................62
8.3 Submittals............................................................................................................................62
8.4 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................63

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

4
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 8.5 Project Condition.................................................................................................................63
8.6 Products...............................................................................................................................64
8.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers.................................................................................................
8.6.2 Mortar Materials................................................................................................................
8.6.3 Mortar and Grout Mixes, Load-Bearing Masonry..............................................................
8.6.4 Mortar Mixes, Non-Load-Bearing Masonry:......................................................................
8.6.5 Refer to drawings and wall type schedules........................................................................
8.6.6 Metal Ties, Anchors and Reinforcement............................................................................
8.7 Executions............................................................................................................................66
8.7.1 Examination.......................................................................................................................
8.7.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................
8.7.3 Workmanship.....................................................................................................................
8.7.4 Laying Masonry Walls and Partition...................................................................................
8.7.5 Laying Masonry Walls and Partition...................................................................................
8.7.6 Field Quality Control..........................................................................................................
8.7.7 Repair, Pointing and Cleaning............................................................................................
8.8 TOLERANCES........................................................................................................................69
8.9 Measurement Method:.......................................................................................................70
9. Plastering.....................................................................................................................................70
9.1 General:...............................................................................................................................70
9.2 References:..........................................................................................................................70
9.3 Submittals............................................................................................................................70
9.4 Quality Assurance................................................................................................................70
9.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................71
9.6 Project Condition.................................................................................................................71
9.7 Products...............................................................................................................................71
9.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers.................................................................................................
9.7.2 Materials............................................................................................................................
9.7.3 Accessories........................................................................................................................
9.8 Executions............................................................................................................................72
9.8.1 Examination.......................................................................................................................
9.8.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................
9.8.3 Plaster Application, General..............................................................................................
9.8.4 Installation of Plastering Accessories.................................................................................
9.8.5 Portland Cement Plaster Application.................................................................................
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
5
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 9.8.6 Plaster Repairs...................................................................................................................
9.8.7 Cutting and Patching..........................................................................................................
9.8.8 Cleaning and Protection.....................................................................................................
9.9 TOLERANCES........................................................................................................................75
9.10 Measurement Method:.......................................................................................................75
10. Painting....................................................................................................................................75
10.1 General:...............................................................................................................................75
10.2 References:..........................................................................................................................75
10.3 Submittals............................................................................................................................76
10.4 Quality Assurance................................................................................................................76
10.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................76
10.6 Project Condition.................................................................................................................77
10.7 Products...............................................................................................................................77
10.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers.................................................................................................
10.7.2 Materials............................................................................................................................
10.8 Executions............................................................................................................................77
10.8.1 Examination.......................................................................................................................
10.8.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................
10.8.3 Application.........................................................................................................................
10.8.4 Cleaning and Protection.....................................................................................................
10.9 Measurement Method:.......................................................................................................79
11. Insulation.................................................................................................................................79
11.1 General:...............................................................................................................................79
11.2 References: this section should be comply with following..................................................80
11.3 Submittals............................................................................................................................80
11.4 Quality Assurance................................................................................................................81
11.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................81
11.6 Project Condition.................................................................................................................81
11.7 Products...............................................................................................................................81
11.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers.................................................................................................
11.7.2 Materials............................................................................................................................
11.8 Executions............................................................................................................................82
11.8.1 Examination.......................................................................................................................
11.8.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................
11.8.3 Installation.........................................................................................................................

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

6
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 11.8.4 Application.........................................................................................................................
11.8.5 Protection and cleaning.....................................................................................................
11.9 Field Quality Control :.........................................................................................................85
12. Tiles Work................................................................................................................................85
12.1 General:...............................................................................................................................85
12.2 References: This section should be comply with following:.................................................85
12.3 Submittals............................................................................................................................87
12.4 Quality Assurance................................................................................................................87
12.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................87
12.6 Products...............................................................................................................................87
12.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers.................................................................................................
12.6.2 Materials............................................................................................................................
12.7 Executions............................................................................................................................89
12.7.1 Examination.......................................................................................................................
12.7.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................
12.7.3 Installation.........................................................................................................................
12.7.4 TOLERANCES......................................................................................................................
12.7.5 Protection and cleaning.....................................................................................................
12.8 Measurement Method:.......................................................................................................91
13. Aluminum Doors and Windows Work......................................................................................91
13.1 General:...............................................................................................................................91
13.2 References: This section should be comply with following:.................................................91
13.3 Submittals............................................................................................................................93
13.4 Quality Assurance and QC:...................................................................................................93
13.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling...............................................................................................94
13.6 Products...............................................................................................................................94
13.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers.................................................................................................
13.6.2 Materials............................................................................................................................
13.7 Executions............................................................................................................................97
13.7.1 Preparation........................................................................................................................
13.7.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................
13.7.3 TOLERANCES......................................................................................................................
13.7.4 Protection and cleaning.....................................................................................................
13.8 Measurement Method:.......................................................................................................98
14. Metal Doors and Frames Work................................................................................................98

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

7
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 14.1 General:...............................................................................................................................98
14.2 References: This section should be comply with following :................................................98
14.3 Submittals..........................................................................................................................100
14.4 Quality Assurance and QC:.................................................................................................100
14.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling.............................................................................................100
14.6 Products.............................................................................................................................100
14.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers...............................................................................................100
14.6.2 Materials..........................................................................................................................100
14.7 Executions..........................................................................................................................102
14.7.1 Examination.....................................................................................................................102
14.7.2 Protection of Components...............................................................................................102
14.7.3 Preparation......................................................................................................................102
14.7.4 Installation.......................................................................................................................102
14.7.5 TOLERANCES....................................................................................................................103
14.7.6 Protection and cleaning...................................................................................................103
14.8 Measurement Method:.....................................................................................................103
15. Plumping Work......................................................................................................................103
15.1 General:.............................................................................................................................103
15.2 References: This section should be comply with following :..............................................104
15.3 Definitions..........................................................................................................................106
15.4 Submittals..........................................................................................................................107
15.5 Quality Assurance and QC:.................................................................................................107
15.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling.............................................................................................108
15.7 Products.............................................................................................................................108
15.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers...............................................................................................108
15.7.2 Materials..........................................................................................................................108
15.8 Executions..........................................................................................................................110
15.8.1 Examination.....................................................................................................................110
15.8.2 Preparation......................................................................................................................111
15.8.3 Installation.......................................................................................................................111
15.8.4 Testing.............................................................................................................................112
15.8.5 Protection and cleaning...................................................................................................113
16. Electrical Works.....................................................................................................................114
16.1 General Requirement........................................................................................................114
16.1.1 Technical Specification.....................................................................................................114

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

8
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 16.1.2 Codes And Standards.......................................................................................................114
16.2 Extend of Work..................................................................................................................115
16.3 Conduct of Work................................................................................................................116
16.4 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................116
16.5 Accessibility.......................................................................................................................116
16.6 Storage of Materials and Equipment.................................................................................116
16.7 Signs and Notices...............................................................................................................117
16.8 Mounting Height................................................................................................................117
16.9 Equipment Label and Identification...................................................................................117
16.10 As-built Drawings...........................................................................................................118
16.11 Submittals......................................................................................................................119
16.12 Distribution Boards (Mani and Sub-main)......................................................................121
16.13 Samples..........................................................................................................................121
16.14 Quality Assurance..........................................................................................................121
16.15 Installation.....................................................................................................................121
16.16 Inspections, testing, and Acceptance.............................................................................122
16.17 Maintenance and Warranty...........................................................................................122
16.18 Standardization..............................................................................................................122
16.19 Quality and Cleaning......................................................................................................122
16.20 Equipment.....................................................................................................................123
16.21 Lighting System and Fixtures.........................................................................................123
16.22 LED Luminaires...............................................................................................................124
16.23 Ceiling Fans....................................................................................................................124
16.24 Electrical Connections....................................................................................................124
16.25 Wires and Cables...........................................................................................................125
16.26 Split Unit Wall-Mounted Air Conditioner.......................................................................126
16.27 Fire alarm system...........................................................................................................127
16.28 Quality Assurance..........................................................................................................127
16.29 ADRESSESABLE FIRE ALARM PANEL...............................................................................127
16.29.1 ADDRESSABLE SMOKE AND HEAT DETECTOR..................................................................128
16.29.2 ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER WITH FLASHER.........................................................................128
16.29.3 RESETTABLE CALL POINT..................................................................................................128
16.29.4 FIELD TESTS:.....................................................................................................................128
16.30 Earthing system.............................................................................................................129
16.31 Cables Trench Work.......................................................................................................129

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

9
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 16.32 Excavation and Backfilling..............................................................................................129
16.33 Portable Fire Extinguishers............................................................................................130
16.34 Existing Equipment........................................................................................................130
16.35 List of detailed Standards...............................................................................................130
17. Health and Safety Management............................................................................................132
17.1 Health & safety requirements............................................................................................132
17.2 Construction Safety...........................................................................................................132
17.3 Barricading.........................................................................................................................132
17.4 Warning Signs....................................................................................................................132
17.5 Storage Of Fuels.................................................................................................................132
17.6 Safety Of Machinery..........................................................................................................133
17.7 First Aid..............................................................................................................................133
17.8 Fire Safety, Emergency And Rescue...................................................................................133
17.9 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................133
17.10 Personal Protective Equipment.....................................................................................133
17.11 Housekeeping................................................................................................................133

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

10
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
1. General Specifications
1.1 General Requirements:
1.1.1 Quantities
Although practical care was exercised in preparing the BOQ, all quantities given herein shall be
deemed to be estimated quantities of the work to be done. They are not to be taken as actual and
correct quantities of the work to be executed and they do not absolve the contractor of his obliga-
tions under the Contract. At any time, the actual quantities increase or decrease, hence, it is under-
stood that the actual quantities increase, or decrease is expected risk and no claim whatsoever will be
taken into consideration for extra cost in that respect by employer. Any claim whatsoever submitted
for cost or extra expenses incurred from such increase or decrease will not be accepted by UNDP ex-
cept where else stipulated in the Contract.
1.1.2 Drawings
Large scale drawings take precedence over small scale drawings. Written or calculable dimensions
take precedence over scaled dimensions. If there are any errors in dimensions, set out or size, imme-
diately notify the Engineer.
1.1.3 Unit Rate:
The Unit Price shall cover all costs of every kind whatsoever including, without being limited to, all
charges for additional site installations, relocation, supervision, labor, transportation and supply of
materials; the provision, maintenance, use and efficient repair of all plant, equipment and appliance
of every kind, the construction and maintenance of all temporary works, the performance of all ser-
vices and the fulfillment of all obligations and responsibilities herein defined.
The works, materials or activities listed in the following shall always be considered as supportive
works to be included in the Unit Prices bid for any item in the Bill of Quantities:
 Any measurement for execution and payment of the works, including the provision of
measuring instruments, gauges, setting out marks, marking paint and relevant tools, la-
bor, etc., the maintenance and preservation of gauges and setting-out marks during the
execution of the works.
 Supply of consumable materials for the Contractor’s equipment.
 Removal of all contamination (refuse, debris, building rubbish and the like) arising from
or in connection with the Contractor’s work to locations approved by the engineers
 Protection of the executed works and of the items made available for execution of the
works from damage, fire, inclement weather, vandalism and theft etc., until the time of
final acceptance.
 Importing, transportation of all materials and structural components from the storage
places on site to the points of use and return transportation, if required.
 Submitting and transporting any samples required.
 Carrying out tests for materials by third party company and testing for the completed
works, etc., that is required by the UNDP engineer/ consultancy firm.
 Fuel and lubricants for operation of Contractor’s equipment.
 All safety precautions and measures for safeguarding labor as well as securing surround-
ing areas.
 Electricity and Lighting of the work site.
 Maintenance, repair or reconstruct damaged infrastructure resulted by contractor’s ac-
tivities.

1.1.4 Testing:
The Contractor is to carry out and attend all tests were nominated in this specification. As a minimum,
the Contractor will carry out the following tests: concrete, cement block, plumbing, steel sections, and
drainage.
The Contractor will supply all necessary appliances and labour for testing of the complete water sup-
ply system at such times and as directed by the Engineer. Such testing shall as a minimum require the
pressurizing of the complete water supply system to a pressure of not less than 4.5bar. The pipe work

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

11
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 and fittings shall retain this pressure for a minimum of 1 hour following the commencement of the
test.
All drains shall be hydraulically tested to a minimum of 1500 mm head and no drains shall be
covered up until such test has been made and repeated as necessary until passed to the approval of
the Engineer. Access plugs and caps shall be removed, greased, refitted and made sound prior to the
final testing.
1.1.5 Reference:
Abbreviations and Symbols. The following abbreviations as referenced in the Contract Documents are
defined to mean the associated names. Both the names and addresses are subject to change, and are
believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Doc-
uments.
American Assoc. of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 444
SHTO
North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, D.C., -
American Concrete Institute, Box 19150 Redford Station Detroit, Michi-
ACI
gan 48219, 313/532-2600
ADAAG American Disability Act Access Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, -, -
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engi-
ASHRAE
neers, -
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers, -, -
American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street Philadel-
ASTM
phia, Pennsylvania 19103, 212/644-7722
United States of America Federal Specifications, General Services Ad-
FED. SPEC. ministration Specification Unit 7th and D Streets, S.W. Washington, DC
20406, 202/472-2205
International Organization for Standardization, 1 Rue de Vermbe, Case
ISO
Postale 56 Geneva 20, Switzerland, -
National Electrical Association (American), 2101 L Street, N.W. Washing-
NEMA
ton, DC 20037, 202/457-8400
National Forest Products Association, 1250 Connecticut Avenue, N.W.
NFPA
Washington, DC 20036, 202/463-2700
Occupational Safety and Health Association, U.S. Department of Labor
OSHA Francis Perkins Building 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington DC
20210, 202/523-8165
Tile Council of America, Inc., P.O. Box 326 Princeton, New Jersey 08540,
TCA
609/921-7050
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 333 Plingisten Road Northbrook, Illinois
UL
60602,
SBC Saudi Building Code

1.2 Project Management and Coordination

1.2.1 Coordination
1. Schedule construction operations in the necessary sequence to ensure optimal results. This
involves arranging the installation of different components based on their dependencies on
each other. Some components may need to be installed before or after others to ensure
proper connection and operation.
2. Coordinate the installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for maintenance, service, and repair. This involves planning and organizing the
installation process to optimize the functionality and ease of maintenance of the installed
components.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items that are scheduled for later installation. This in-
cludes considering the space, access, and structural requirements necessary for the installa-
tion of future components or equipment.

B. Memoranda Preparation:

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

12
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Prepare memoranda outlining special procedures required for coordination and distribute them to
all parties involved. These memoranda should include information such as required notices, re-
ports, and a list of attendees for coordination meetings.

Prepare similar memoranda for the employer and separate contractors if their work requires coor-
dination with each other. This ensures that all relevant parties are informed of the necessary coor-
dination procedures.

C. Administrative Procedures:

Coordinate the scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construc-
tion activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the work. Some of the administra-
tive activities that need to be coordinated include:

1. Preparation of the contractor's construction schedule, which should be continually up-

dated and presented in a format acceptable to the employer.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values, which outlines the value assigned to each compo-
nent or phase of the project.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls, such as temporary struc-
tures or safety measures, that are necessary during the construction process.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals, including the review and approval of shop draw-
ings, product data, and samples.
5. Conducting progress meetings to review the status of the project, address any issues or
concerns, and coordinate upcoming activities.
6. Organizing pre-installation conferences to discuss the installation procedures, coordina-
tion requirements, and any specific considerations for the upcoming work.
7. Managing project closeout activities, such as final inspections, testing, and documenta-
tion, to ensure a smooth transition to the completion of the project.
8. Coordinating the startup and adjustment of systems to ensure that all mechanical, elec-
trical, and other systems are properly commissioned and functioning as intended.

1.2.2 Requests for Information (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpreta-
tion of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit a RFI. All RFIs
should be sent directly to the Engineer by hand and via email or posted to project collab-
oration site (if one is being utilized). The Engineer will redistribute to the appropriate re-
viewer.
1. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contrac-
tor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name
2. Project number
3. Date
4. Name of Contractor
5. Name of Engineer
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially
7. RFI subject
8. RFI Question
9. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate
10. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate
11. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate
12. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Con-
tract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

13
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 13. Contractor's signature
14. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary
to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of af-
fected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated
above, acceptable to Engineer or the form advised by the Engineer. RFIs should be sent
to Engineer with the following format standards. 1) RFI should include RFI number in sub-
ject line of email along with brief description. 2) Body of email should include question or
description of RFI and suggestion. Sketches or other necessary documents should be at-
tached to email in PDF format.
D. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven (7) business days for Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engi-
neer after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals
b. Requests for approval of substitutions
c. Requests for coordination information already indi-
cated in the Contract Documents
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum
e. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on
submittals
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs
2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional infor-
mation.
3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal accord-
ing to "Contract Modification Procedures".
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants
change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum,
notify Engineer in writing within ten (10) days of re-
ceipt of the RFI response.
E. On receipt of Engineer's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI re-
sponse to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Con-
tractor disagrees with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. log with not less than the following:
1. RFI Log Date
2. Project name
3. Name and address of Contractor
4. Name and address of Engineer and Construction Manager
5. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted
6. RFI description
7. Date the RFI was submitted
8. Request Date
9. Date Engineer's and Construction Manager's response was received
10. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive,
and Proposal Request, as appropriate
11. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request,
as appropriate
1.2.3 Project Meetings
A. General: Assist the Engineer in scheduling and conducting meetings and conferences at
Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

14
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 1.Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose pres-
ence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Employer and Engi-
neer of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited atten-
dees in advance of meeting.
3. The Engineer will record Minutes and distribute copies within three (3) days af-
ter meeting to participants, with two copies to the Contractor , Employer, partic-
ipants, and those affected by decision made.
B. Pre-construction Conference / Kick Off Meeting: Assist the Engineer in scheduling and
conducting a pre-construction conference before starting construction, at a time conve-
nient to the Employer and Engineer, but no later than fifteen (15) days after the notice to
proceed.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. The attendees should include authorized representatives of the Employer, Su-
pervision Engineer, Contractor, its superintendent, major subcontractors, suppli-
ers, and other concerned parties who are familiar with the project and autho-
rized to conclude matters relating to the work.
3. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees in advance of the meeting. Discuss
items of significance that could affect progress, such as the tentative construc-
tion schedule, phasing, critical work sequencing, designation of key personnel
and their duties, lines of communication, procedures for processing field deci-
sions and change orders, procedures for RFIs, procedures for testing and in-
specting, procedures for processing applications for payment, distribution of the
contract documents, submittal procedures, sustainable design requirements,
preparation of record documents, use of the premises (including existing build-
ings), work restrictions, working hours, employer's occupancy requirements, re-
sponsibility for temporary facilities and controls, procedures for moisture and
mold control, procedures for disruptions and shutdowns, construction waste
management and recycling, parking availability, office, work, and storage areas,
equipment deliveries and priorities, first aid, security, progress cleaning, com-
missioning requirements/coordination, and any other items requested to be
added by the Engineer.
4. The Engineer should record minutes and distribute copies within three (3) days
after the meeting to participants, with two copies to the Contractor, Employer,
participants, and those affected by decisions made.
C. Pre-Installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at the project site be-
fore each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. The attendees should include the installer and representatives of manufacturers
and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or
integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will fol-
low. Advise the Engineer of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees in advance of the meeting. Review
the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for contract documents,
options, related RFIs, related change orders, purchases, deliveries, submittals,
review of mockups, possible conflicts, compatibility problems, time schedules,
weather limitations, manufacturer's written recommendations, warranty re-
quirements, compatibility of materials, acceptability of substrates, temporary fa-
cilities and controls, space and access limitations, regulations of authorities hav-
ing jurisdiction, testing and inspecting requirements, installation procedures, co-
ordination with other work, required performance results, and protection of ad-
jacent work and construction personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, in-
cluding required corrective measures and actions.
4. Record minutes and distribute copies within three (3) days after the meeting to
participants, with two copies to the Engineer, Employer, participants, and those
affected by decisions made.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
15
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 5.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully con-
cluded. Initiate necessary actions to resolve impediments to the performance of
the work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a
time convenient to the Employer and Engineer, but no later than 90 days prior to the
scheduled date of substantial completion/taking over.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to
project closeout.
2. The attendees should include authorized representatives of the Employer, Su-
pervision Engineer, their consultants, Contractor, its superintendent, major sub-
contractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties who are familiar with the
project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work.
3. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees in advance of the meeting. Discuss
items of significance that could affect or delay project closeout, including prepa-
ration of record documents, procedures required prior to inspection for substan-
tial completion and final inspection for acceptance, submittal of written war-
ranties, requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation, require-
ments for preparing operations and maintenance data, requirements for
demonstration and training, preparation of the Contractor's punch list, proce-
dures for processing applications for payment at substantial completion and fi-
nal payment, submittal procedures, coordination of separate contracts, em-
ployer's partial occupancy requirements, installation of employer's furniture, fix-
tures, and equipment, and responsibility for removing temporary facilities and
controls.
4. Record minutes and distribute copies within three (3) days after the meeting to
participants, with two copies to the Engineer, Employer, participants, and those
affected by decisions made.
E. Progress Meetings: Assist the Engineer in conducting progress meetings at agreed-upon
intervals.
1. Coordinate the dates of the meetings with the preparation of payment requests
If any.
2. The attendees should include representatives of the Employer, Supervision Engi-
neer, each contractor, and any other entity concerned with the current progress
or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All par-
ticipants at the meeting should be familiar with the project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the work.
3. Agenda: Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees in advance of the meet-
ing. Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of sched-
ule, or behind schedule, in relation to the Contractor's construction
schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expe-
dited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss
whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review the schedule for the next period.
c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1. Review minutes of the previous meeting.
2. Interface requirements.
3. Sequence of operations.
4. Status of submittals.
5. Deliveries.
6. Off-site fabrication.
7. Access.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

16
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 8. Site utilization.
9. Temporary facilities and controls.
10. Progress cleaning.
11. Quality and work standards.
12. Status of correction of deficient items.
13. Field observations.
14. Status of RFIs (Requests for Information).
15. Status of proposal requests.
16. Pending changes.
17. Status of Change Orders.
18. Pending claims and disputes.
19. Documentation of information for payment requests.
20. Recommendations of construction feasibility.
21. Safety precautions and programs.
22. Other business related to the work.
23. Any other items to be added by the Engineer.
4.
The Engineer is to record minutes and distribute copies within three (3) days af-
ter the meeting to participants, with two copies to the Contractor, Employer,
participants, and those affected by decisions made.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's construction schedule after
each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been
made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the
report of each meeting.
F. Meetings Requested by Employer or the Engineer: While not necessarily coinciding with
the dates of other meetings, the Employer and the Engineer reserve the right to call and
conduct meetings with project participants as the need arises.

1.3 PRELIMINARIES
1.3.1 Pre-Construction work:
1.3.1.1 General:
The Engineer and Contractor will conduct a joint condition-in survey using digital photographs to
record and document the site's condition during handover to the Contractor. This survey will establish
the initial state of the site, which the Contractor must be responsible for returning in the same condi-
tion upon completion of the works.

The Contractor will carry out a detailed site setting out for the works.
A pre‐Construction meeting will be held between the Engineer and the Contractor to review the fol -
lowing information:
 Condition-in Survey
 Site Survey
 Work Method Statement
 Work Program
 Schedule of Materials and Installed Equipment.
The Contractor must mobilize on the project site within 7 calendar days of the date of issue of the No-
tice to commence.
1.3.1.2 Site restrictions
Site security limitations: It is imperative to comply with any restrictions imposed on the site area, ac-
cess, or working times as advised by the Engineer.

Access: The ability to enter and move within the site, as well as utilizing the site for temporary works
and constructional plant, including working and storage areas, placement of offices, workshops,
sheds, roads, and parking, is strictly limited to the areas depicted on the drawings or as agreed upon
with the Engineer.
1.3.1.3 Occupied areas of site or buildings
For the parts of the site designated as occupied areas in the occupied areas schedule:
Allow occupants to continue using the area for the required period.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
17
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 1. Make available safe access for occupants.
2. Arrange work to minimize nuisance to occupants and ensure their safety.
3. Protect occupants against weather, dust, dirt, water or other nuisance, by such means
as temporary screens.
1.3.1.4 MISCELLANEOUS Compliance with the law
The Contractor is responsible for compliance with all requirements of authorities. The owner,
before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid the fees, and obtained the per-
mits, approvals and other authorizations stated in the Prior applications and approvals

1.3.1.5 Protection of persons and property

Temporary works: Provide and maintain required barricades, guards, fencing, shoring, temporary
roadways, footpaths, signs, lighting and traffic flagging.
Access ways, services: Do not obstruct or damage roadways and footpaths, drains and watercourses
and other existing services in use on or adjacent to the site. Determine the location of such services. If
damage occurs, immediately repair it at the Contractors cost.
Property: Do not damage property which is to remain on or adjacent to the site, including adjoining
property encroaching onto the site. If damage occurs, immediately repair it at the Contractors cost.
1.3.2 Adjoining property
Records: For properties described in the Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule:
- The Contractor is to inspect the properties with the Engineer and owners and occupants of
the properties, before start of work.
- Make detailed records of conditions existing within the properties, especially structural de-
fects and other damage or defacement.
- Arrange for at least 2 copies of each record, including drawings, written descriptions, and
photographs, to be endorsed by the owners and occupants, or their representatives, as evi-
dence of conditions existing before commencement of work.
- Submit one endorsed copy of each record to the Engineer. The Contractor is to keep the
other endorsed copy.
1.3.3 Project signboards
Provide project‐specific signboards and the following:
- Location, size and wording as directed by Engineer.
- Maintain in good condition for duration of the work.
- All the steel of the project shin should be galvanized, all steel section should be hot dips gal-
vanized. All galvanizing shall be hot dip in accordance with BS 729 with minimum coating
weight of:
o 460 g/m2 for thickness over 2mm.
o 335 g/m2 for thickness less than 2mm.
The painting of metal sections shall include the preparation of the metal surface, the appli-
cation, protection and drying of the paint coatings, and the supplying of all tools, tackle,
scaffolding, labor, and materials necessary for the entire work.
All steel shall receive one prime coat in the workshop and three field coats. The color shall be
as indicated. The coats shall be sufficiently different in color to permit detection of incom-
plete application.
cleaning for sections, peeling, grinding existing damaged paints layers, leaning the surfaces
properly of dust, dirt, stuck, etc., applying three layers of painting. The first layer consists of
anticorrosive primer based upon pure epoxy technology which has excellent adhesion to gal-
vanized steel, excellent anti corrosive properties and water resistant and excellent recoata-
bility. Second layer which is mid coat which has polyamide-cured recoatable epoxy coating
which protective coating for marine conditions, excellent anti corrosive. Third layer which is
finishing layer with aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish which has unlimited recoatable, ex-
cellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions.
- Project identification sign board shall be illuminated.
- The project sign shall be located on the site (as directed by the Engineer and Employer), at
such a location so as to be highly visible and not to obstruct pedestrian or vehicular traffic.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

18
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 The sign shall be set 1.2 meters above the ground, measured from grade to the lower edge
of the metal sheet. . In addition to the sign erection, the Contractor shall be responsible for
the complete design, graphics, and supporting methods.
- Costs for preparation, installation and removal of signboards after completion of construc-
tion works
1.4 General Contractor’s Obligations:
 The Contractor must submit Detailed Shop Drawings showing details of the fabrication and in-
stallation of services and equipment, including relationship to building structure and other ser-
vices, cable type and size, and marking details. It should be approved by the UNDP engineer/
consultancy firm before commencement of the work, and all required materials should be sup-
plied as specified and subject to the Engineer’s approval.
 All works must be done according to the instructions of UNDP engineer/ consultancy firm, Draw-
ings and specification.
 The Contractor must repair any damages of any services to the full satisfaction of relevant Ser -
vice Authority
 Price will include costs of removing and/or relocating of all obstacles such as debris, garbage and
existing services in addition to the required materials necessary for work completion according
to engineer's instructions and specifications.
 The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the UNDP against all losses and claims for
injuries or damage to any persons or any property whatsoever which may arise out of or in con-
sequence of the construction and maintenance of works and against all claims, demands pro-
ceedings, damages costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect of or in relation thereto.
 The contractor will have to make their own arrangement for facilitating movement of labor and
materials to work site and back. The Contractor is required to install temporary fence for the
site, before commencing the works, and this fence must be removed once the Employer ob-
tains a Permit to Operate, and is actually going to start normal daily operation.
 The contractor shall get the approval from the Employer before erecting and final removal of
the fence. The fence shall contain Two entrances lockable from inside and from outside and
shall be kept secure at all times.
 The fence shall be erected within 10 days of the date of access to site; the fence
shall be fixed around the working area as per the Drawings. In case the Contractor
did not carry out this work on time, the Employer has the right to erect the fence on
the contactor’s expense.
 In order not to annoy other occupants, the doors of the Project must be
kept closed at all times, the doors shall have a handle from inside the Demised area
only; i.e. no handle from the outside.
 Replace or repair any material damaged during work to original condition at start of
work.
 The contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense’s safety signs when and where
necessary or required by the UNDP engineer/ consultancy firm for the protection of the works
or for the safety and convenience of those employed on the works or the public.
 The Contractor is required to provide adequate toilet and washroom facilities for his staff. These
facilities shall be kept clean and serviceable at all times.
 The contractor should provide his own generators and electricity
 The Contractor is required to provide adequate first aid equipment on ‐site, failure of the Con -
tractor to ensure the availability of first aid equipment on‐site will result in an immediate ‘stop
work’ order being issued. All costs and time delays resulting from any such ‘stop work’ order is
entirely the Contractors responsibility.
 A site office will be established by the Contractor at the work site. The location of the site office
will be identified by the Engineer to the Contractor. The office will have a complete set of the
contract documents. The Contractor is to maintain a safe, healthy and tidy worksite at all times
and all work activities are to be performed with protective and safety equipment appropriate
for the task. The Contractor is entirely responsible for workplace safety and unsafe work prac-
tices will be identified and recommendations made for revised work methods as appropriate.
 Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

19
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
  The contractor shall bear the responsibility and associated costs for ensuring the safety and
well-being of their staff at all times during the execution of the project. This includes, but is not
limited to, providing adequate safety training, personal protective equipment (PPE), and imple-
menting safety protocols and procedures in accordance OSHA, regulations, and industry best
practices. The contractor shall allocate necessary resources and funds to maintain a safe work-
ing environment and mitigate potential hazards. Any costs related to safety measures, including
the provision of safety equipment and training, shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
The contractor shall demonstrate a commitment to allocating sufficient resources for safety and
complying with safety standards throughout the duration of the project
1.5 Completion Of the Works
1.5.1 General
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
1.5.2 Issuing Taking Over Certificate
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of issuing taking over cer-
tificate complete the following list items below that are incomplete in request:
a. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (Snagging List), the value of
items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
b. Advise Employer of pending insurance changeover requirements.
c. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,
final certifications, and similar documents.
d. Obtain and submit releases permitting Employer unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates,
and similar releases.
e. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manu-
als, Final .
f. Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property sur-
veys, and similar final record information.
g. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated
by Employer.
h. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
i. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Employer. Advise Em-
ployer's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
j. Complete startup testing of systems.
k. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
l. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
m. Advise Employer of changeover in heat and other utilities.
n. Submit changeover information related to Employer's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
o. Complete final cleaning requirements includes touch up paining
p. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate vis-
ual defects.
1.5.3 List of Incomplete Items Snagging List
A. Preparation
a. Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correc-
tion including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits
of construction.
b. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and pro-
ceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

20
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 c.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
d. Within 10 working days after practical completion, remove temporary works and
construction plant no longer required. Remove the balance before the end of the
defect’s liability period.
e. Include the following information at the top of each page:
i. Project name.
ii. Date.
iii. Name of Engineer
iv. Name of Project Manager
v. Name of Contractor.
vi. Page number.
B. Executive
a. The contractor shall diligently review and acknowledge the snagging list provided by
the project owner or their representatives.
b. The contractor shall address each item on the snagging list promptly and efficiently,
ensuring that all outstanding or incomplete items are rectified.
c. The contractor shall allocate the necessary resources, including manpower, materi-
als, and expertise, to complete the snagging list in a timely manner.
d. The contractor shall coordinate with relevant subcontractors, suppliers, and other
involved parties to ensure the timely resolution of snagging items that fall under
their responsibility.
e. The contractor shall conduct necessary repairs, adjustments, or replacements to
bring the project to the required standards and specifications.
f. Final Inspection:
1. The contractor shall coordinate a final inspection with the project owner or
their representatives to verify the completion of the snagging list.
2. The contractor shall facilitate the presence of relevant personnel and ex-
perts during the final inspection to address any concerns or queries.
3. The contractor shall ensure that all snagging items identified in the list have
been appropriately addressed and rectified before the final inspection.
4. The contractor shall cooperate with the project owner and their represen-
tatives during the final inspection process and provide necessary documen-
tation, reports, or evidence of completion.
1.5.4 Final cleaning
Before Practical Completion, clean throughout, including interior and exterior surfaces exposed
to view. Clean carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean debris from the site, roofs, gutters, downpipes
and drainage systems. Remove waste and surplus materials.
1.5.5 Post construction Works
The Contractor will provide the following documentation after all site construction has been
completed:
- Warranty Statement
- Material Test Certificates
- As‐Built Drawings
A condition‐out survey will be conducted with the Contractor and Engineer at which damages
caused by the Contractor will be identified. The Engineer will determine if the Contractor is to
make repairs or if the damage will be deducted from the Contractor’s final invoice.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

21
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
2. Site Preparation
2.1 GENERAL
The aim of this work section is to clear the site and put in place adequate environmental controls
to allow the commencement of rehabilitation works.
2.2 Work Included:
Work in this section includes:
1. Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services required for clearing and grubbing,
demolition, and removal and disposal of items as specified herein and on the plans.
2. Removal and satisfactory disposal of all vegetation, surface debris and scattered stones
and rocks within the limits of the Project boundaries, (except items designated to remain or
which are to be removed at a later stage of the Work).
3. Removal, wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all buildings, fences, structures,
abandoned pipelines, and any other obstructions, as shown on the Drawings, which are not
designated or permitted to remain, except for any obstructions as shown on the Drawings
which are to be removed and disposed of at a later stage of the Works. It shall also include
the salvaging of designated materials and backfilling the resulting trenches, holes and pits.
2.3 Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to applicable local codes for demolition of structures, dust control, and runoff
control.
2. Obtain required permits and licenses from appropriate authorities. Pay associated fees
including disposal charges.
3. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their
requirements.
4. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or fire hydrants without appropriate
permits.
5. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated
materials are discovered.
2.4 Execution:
2.4.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall examine the Site and record all obstructions and utilities at the
commencement of the Works.
2.4.2 Construction
The contactor must submit the methods and equipment proposed for disposal, control of erosion,
noise and dust control, contamination of the site, surrounding areas and drainage systems.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
22
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 1. Clearing and Grubbing:
A. The Contractor shall set out the approved construction limits, and the Engineer will designate
all trees, shrubs, plants, vegetation, etc., and other items to remain within the limits of the
site. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all such items from damage or defacement.
B. All surface objects, trees, stumps, roots, stones, and rocks (up to 0.2 cu.m. or 500 kg individual
size or weight), and other protruding obstructions not designated to be retained shall be
cleared or grubbed to ground level. In the case of trees with a girth of one meter or less, they
should be removed entirely or at least one meter below ground level or as instructed by the
Engineer.
C. Stump holes and other holes from which obstructions are removed within the Project bound-
aries of construction shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted in accordance
with Section 4 works. Holes outside the Project boundaries shall be filled to the adjacent level.
D. Perishable material shall be burned under the constant care of competent watchmen at times
and in a manner that will not jeopardize any vegetation or other items designated to remain
within the Project boundaries or other adjacent property. Burning shall be carried out in ac -
cordance with applicable laws and ordinances.
E. Materials, stones, rocks, and debris that cannot be burned, as well as approved perishable
materials, shall be removed from the Project boundaries and disposed of at approved dump-
ing areas off the Site, provided that written permission has been obtained from the respective
property owners to dump such materials on their land. Where designated on the drawings,
the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with property owners to obtain written
permission to dispose of materials at their own expense.
2. Removal of Obstructions and Utilities
A. The Contractor shall raze, remove and dispose of all buildings, slabs, structures,
fences and other obstructions, any portions of which are on the Project boundaries,
except utilities and items for which other arrangements for removal have been made.
All designated salvageable material shall be removed, without causing unnecessary
damage, and in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be stored
by the Contractor at approved locations, for later use or possession of others.
B. Unusable perishable material shall be destroyed. Non-perishable material may be
disposed of off the Site, provided permission of the respective property owners has been
obtained in writing to dump such materials on their land.
C. Salvaged pipe culverts and other re-usable structures shall be stored at accessible
approved locations on Site and shall become the property of the employer.
3. Removal of Utilities
A. The Contractor shall notify all Utility Owners and cooperate with them in respect of
removals, disposal and relocations.
B. The Removal of all disconnected or abandoned Utilities within the Project boundaries
shall be carried out by the Contactor, unless the Utility Owner indicates his intention to
carry out such removal and the salvaging of materials, fittings, parts, etc.
C. The Contractor shall advise each affected Utility Owner in writing of his proposed
construction schedule and liaise for inspection by the Utility Owners and interruption or
disconnection of the Utilities as appropriate.
D. All excavation and backfill shall conform with the requirements of earthwork Section.
E. All other unused and/or unsuitable fill materials in the site from current and/or previous
works.
2.4.3 Protection of Adjacent Areas
The Contractor shall protect areas shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer of
Record to remain protected from damage by construction operations by erecting suitable
barriers of other acceptable means.
2.4.3.1 Environmental Protection Dust Protection
Provide dust‐proof screens, bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the immediate
environment from dust and debris.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

23
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
2.4.3.2 Dewatering
Keep groundworks free of water. Provide and maintain slopes and drains on excavations and em-
bankments to ensure free drainage. Place construction, including fill, masonry, concrete and ser-
vices, on ground from which free water has been removed. Prevent water flow over freshly laid
work.
2.4.3.3 Excavation
Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services.
2.4.4 Disposal
All roots, vegetation and other refuse removed from the site during clearing and/or grubbing
operations shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor. Where required, the Contractor shall
obtain a permit from the authority and/or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over
the work area before burning any material on the site.

3. Demolitions
3.1 GENERAL
Section Includes: Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
3.2 References:
1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
29 CFR Part 19 10 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR Part 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
2. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) FED-STD-795.

3.3 Interpretation
Demolished materials classes
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, and store.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not oth-
erwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle
methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items
unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
3.4 Submittals:
1. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
2. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the mea-
sures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control and for noise control.
Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
3. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
a. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
b. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
c. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4.Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, in-

cluding finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition opera-
tions.
5. Closeout submittal: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
3.5 Field Conditions:
1. Notify the engineer of any discrepancies between existing conditions and the Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
2. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is strictly prohibited.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

24
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3.
Regarding utility service, maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and take
necessary measures to protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
4. Arrange the selective demolition schedule in a way that it does not interfere with the Owner's
operations.
3.6 Products:
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with government notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having juris-
diction.
3.7 Execution:
3.7.1 Examination:
A. Before starting selective demolition operations, verify that utilities have been disconnected
and capped.
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and
hazardous material information provided by Owner. However, the owner does not guarantee
that the existing conditions are identical to those indicated in the Project Record Documents.
C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure
or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1. Continuously perform surveys as the Work progresses to identify any hazards arising
from selective demolition activities
D. Before proceeding with building demolition operations, ensure that hazardous materials have
been properly remediated.
E. Conduct a survey of existing conditions by capturing preconstruction photographs or video.
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued
as damage caused by salvage operations.
2. Prior to selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will
be reproduced or duplicated in the final Work, create a permanent record of
measurements (which must be verified by the Engineer on-site for payment
purposes), materials, and construction details necessary for an exact reproduc-
tion.
3.7.2 Preparation & Protection
A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris in manner to ensure minimum interfer-
ence with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent
buildings and facilities designated to remain.
1. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required for
safety
and security.
2. Provide barriers and appropriate signs meeting requirements of 29 CFR 1910
for
size and color where necessary to restrict pedestrians from wandering into
construction areas.
3. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and
removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new
construction to ensure no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or inte-
rior areas of existing building.
4. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and existing finish work that are to remain in
place
and are exposed during demolition operations.
5. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures that are to remain from
soiling or damage.
C. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust or dust mi-
gration, and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

25
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing or structural support to preserve
stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures and adjacent facilities
that are not part of demolition.
1. Temporary support
 If temporary support is required, certification for its design and instal-
lation is required from a professional engineer engaged by the con-
tractor.
 Provide temporary support for sections of existing buildings that are
to be altered and normally rely on the work to be demolished for
support.
 Provide support for excavations during the demolition of under-
ground structures.
 Provide supports to adjacent structures, where necessary, to prevent
damage resulting from the demolition works.
2. Permanent supports
If permanent supports for adjacent structures are necessary and not

described, notify and obtain instructions.
E. Provide acceptable temporary security barriers where physical security of buildings or
fences is compromised due to demolition work.
F. Notify affected utility companies before work and comply with their requirements and
mark location and termination of utilities.
G. Do not use explosives in the demolition process.

3.7.3 Selective Demolition, General:

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only where is required. Use meth-
ods required to complete the work within limitations of governing regulations and as fol-
lows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grind-
ing, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill using anti vibration Hilti from the exposed or finished side into con-
cealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting opera-
tions.
6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method
suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials
so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items thoroughly.
2. After cleaning, pack or crate the items securely. Clearly identify the contents of
each container.
3. Store the items in a secure area until they can be delivered to the Owner.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

26
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 4.
During transportation to the Owner's storage area on-site, take necessary mea-
sures to protect the items from any potential damage. Ensure proper handling
and storage during transportation and while in storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to a functional condition that is suitable for their in-
tended reuse.
2. After cleaning and repairing, pack or crate the items securely. Clearly label the
contents of each container.
3. Take appropriate measures to protect the items from damage during trans-
portation and storage.
4. Reinstall the items in the designated locations as indicated. Comply with the in-
stallation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide the neces-
sary connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to ensure that the
item is fully functional for its intended use.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Take measures to protect the construction elements indicated
to remain from damage and soiling during selective demolition. If approved by the engi-
neer, you may remove these items to a suitable and protected storage location during se-
lective demolition. After the selective demolition operations are complete, clean and re-
install these items in their original locations as instructed.

3.7.4 Disposal of Demolished Materials

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an
approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or
other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled
descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7.5 Cleaning
A. Remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site upon completion of
demolition work.
B. Remove protections as approved by the Engineer and leave interior areas broom clean.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

27
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
4. Concrete Forming and Accessories:
4.1 General
A. Provide, and remove all formwork to produce cast-in-place concrete structures as indicated or
specified.
B. Use formwork to cast all concrete structures and encasements including foundation, base slabs,
footings, slabs on grade, grade beams, and pile caps.
C. Provide, and remove all formwork for electrical structures as in-
dicated or specified under electrical work.
4.2 References:
American Concrete Institute (ACI):
ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 301 Specification for Structural Concrete.
ACI 347R Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
IBC International building code
British Standards (BS)
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete.
BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 Eu- Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules of buildings
rocode 2
BS 5975:2008+A1:2011 Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress de-
sign of falsework
ASTM C920 Cold applied two-part polysulphide concrete joint sealer.
ASTM D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construc-
tion.
BS 5337 Appendix D, Paragraph D4-Waterstop.
ACI 301 Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.3 Waterstop
4.3 Submittals:
A. Method Statement
1. The contractor shall submit a detailed method statement regarding concrete pro-
duction, placement and form work Including details of the construction equipment,
which is to be used to erect formwork and place concrete, which will affect the struc-
ture as shown on the structural drawings.
2. Product Data
a. Submit manufacturer's technical data.
b. Submit manufacturers recommended mixing and placing instructions
B. Shop Drawing.
1. Provide Shop Drawings showing all formwork and temporary works details. De-
tails of all fittings, features, associated formwork and temporary works for in-
stallation shall be included. Typical details shall not be accepted.
2. All interfaces shall be shown on the Shop Drawings, particularly in respect to
corner junctions, services and interfaces with other Trades.
3. For all critical finishes, the three-dimensional geometry, setting out and rela-
tionship to the next panels shall be clearly conveyed for comment by the Engi-
neer.
C. Calculation
1.The Contractor shall indicate formwork design data, such as permissible rate of
concrete placement, and temperature of concrete in forms.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

28
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 2.The Contractor shall Submit for review as directed by the Engineer and calcula-
tions, which demonstrate the design intent and stability of formwork. These
should show all temporary works involved.
3.The supports should be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-
weight, formwork weight, formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet con-
crete weight, construction and wind loads, together with all incidental dynamic
effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting the concrete.
4.The Contractor shall submit Design Calculations for review all temporary propping.
D. Samples
1. Various samples of fastening devices and anchors, etc.
4.4 Quality Control
A. Produce working drawings showing details of form type, methods of form construction
and erection, location of form joints, form ties, and shoring. Keep a copy of drawings in
field office during form erection.
B. Notify the Engineer a minimum of four (4) hours before the closure of forms which would
make subsequent inspection difficult.
C. Design and construct formwork in conformance with methodology of BS8110:part 1, un-
less otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer. the faces of formwork for all finish
types shall have a uniform texture and a matt (not a shiny or polished) surface finish. The
edges of the formwork shall be straight, square and sealed at the edges.
D. Check vertical and horizontal alignment of formwork by means of transit or theodolite
before placing concrete. Permit the Engineer to examine formwork with the set up in-
strument, if requested. Adjust formwork to maintain the concrete tolerances specified
after placing concrete.
E. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, do not use fair face formwork more than six
Times
F. Do not remove formwork before the minimum time limitations specified in this section.
G. Remove all formwork from concrete.
H. Minimum 21 days prior to starting concrete work, submit proposed quality control proce-
dures for the Engineers review for the following items: Formwork erection, Formwork re-
moval and Joints.
4.5 Field Quality Control
A. Inspect and check the complete formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that the Work
is in accordance with the formwork design as submitted to the Engineer.
B. If requested, submit test data on patented and proprietary devices and assemblies that
are proposed for use on the Work.
4.6 Products
4.6.1 Materials
A. Formwork:
1. Design formwork in accordance with BS 8110: Part 1. Unless otherwise specified or
agreed with the Engineer, the faces of formwork for all finish types shall have a uni-
form texture and a matt (not a shiny or polished) surface finish. The edges of the
formwork shall be straight, square and sealed at the edges
2. Select formwork materials to provide the required finish and to meet the standards
specified herein. Regular shuttering layout based upon sheets of plywood centred on
columns shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance. No more than one knot
replacement in any 300mm x 300mm area shall occur. The plywood or other sub-
strate shall be subject to acceptance and from one source throughout the works.
3. Formwork for Class 1/Type B finish shall be a high quality birch plywood or equiva-
lent substrate with a phenolic resin coating (balanced as required) to provide the re-
quired finish. Materials used as formers for profiled formwork, chamfers, splays, re-
bates and other features to be such that they produce the same finish as the main
formwork. Do not use steel shutters without acceptance.
4. Submit details of formwork products proposed for acceptance by the Engineer.
5. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, do not use fair face formwork more than
six times
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
29
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 6. For formwork where special shapes are required (i.e. curved or circular shapes), pro-
vide suitable moulds to match the main formwork and allow for repetition if re-
quired. Use appropriate shutter release systems for columns (spiral shutter system).
Submit column layout identifying seams to the Engineer for acceptance.
7. Keep kicker plates to a minimum below level of finished floor.
8. Form chamfers with when fixing.
9. Design molds shall allow visible faces to be as consistent as possible.
B. Quality and types of finishes
1. Quality of Finish: The quality of concrete finish shall be identified by the following
classifications in accordance with BS 8110: Part 1:
a. Class 2 - applicable to surfaces that shall be exposed to view but where ap-
pearance is not critical.
b. Class 1 - applicable to most surfaces exposed to view, with additional finish
requirements as further described herein.
c. Special Class - applicable to high standards of appearance as required by the
Engineer.
2. Type of Surface Finish: The Type of finish shall be identified by the following codes, in
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1:
a. Type A finish: This finish shall be achieved by the use of properly designed
formwork or molds of timber, plywood, plastics, concrete or steel. Small
blemishes caused by entrapped air or water may be expected, but the sur-
face shall be free of voids, honeycombing or other blemishes.
b. Type B finish: This finish shall be achieved using high-quality concrete and
formwork. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted, and all surfaces
shall be true, with clean arises. Only very minor surface blemishes shall oc-
cur and no staining or discoloration from the release agent shall be permit-
ted.
c. Type C finish: This finish is obtained by first producing a Type B finish. The
surface shall then be improved by carefully removing all fins and other pro-
jections, thoroughly washing it down and then filling the most noticeable
surface blemishes with a cement and fine aggregate paste to match the
color of the original concrete. The release agent shall be carefully chosen to
ensure that the concrete surface does not become stained or discoloured.
After the concrete has been properly cured, the face shall be rubbed down,
where necessary, to produce a smooth and even surface.
C. Finish types within the project:
1. Basic finish
This finish is obtained by the use of properly designed formwork or moulds of closely
jointed saw or wrought boards or other suitable material. The surfaces will be im-
printed with the grain of the boards and their joints. In addition, small blemishes
caused by entrapped air or water may be expected, but the surface should be free
from voids, honeycombing or other large blemishes. The holes left for formwork
bolts shall be filled. Fins and irregularities projecting more than 3mm shall be cleaned
off. A sample of the formwork to be used must be submitted to the Engineer for re-
view and comment.

2. Fair faced concrete finish equivalent to class 1 quality and type finish, with the fol-
lowing additional requirements:
a. Produce a smooth, even finish with an impervious sheet material (e.g. high
quality resin film faced plywood) arranged in an accepted regular pattern as
a feature of the surface. This shall coincide with the architectural features as
indicated on the Design Drawings. Do not replace parts of the formwork
panels where this may cause a change in color in the concrete.
b. Abrupt irregularities shall be not greater than 1mm. Gradual irregularities,
expressed as maximum permissible deviation from a 1m straightedge, shall
be not greater than 3mm.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

30
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 The surface shall be free from discoloration caused by contamination from a
c.
release agent, grout leakage or other sources.
d. Cover spacers: No spacers shall be neither visible nor rust marks evident.
e. Generally, surfaces shall be free of voids, honeycombing, segregation and
other defects. Voids shall be kept to an absolute minimum whilst ensuring
compliance with other requirements of the Specification. The following cri-
teria shall be observed:
I. No blowholes larger than 20mm² shall be acceptable. There
shall be no more than 3 such holes in any square metre of sur-
face area.
II. The concrete shall have a consistent, uniform, matt, light
coloured face.
III. The concrete shall be free of surface blemishes visible to the
eye at 3m.
IV. No repairs are permitted to the formwork, unless acceptance
has been given. Damaged panels shall be replaced with mate-
rial of the
same performance and shall be grout washed to blend in with
the existing panels.
V. No water or grout loss shall be permitted. Marks no larger than
50mm in any dimension shall be acceptable.
VI. Making good: Making good shall be minimal and consistent to
an accepted sample. As far as possible, the finished surface
shall be achieved without making good. The improvement of
the surface finish by the Contractor (e.g. filling noticeable sur-
face blemishes) shall be agreed with the Engineer, prior to any
work being carried out. Continuity of personnel for making
good, where required, shall be provided by the Contractor, to
the complete acceptance of the Engineer.
f. Formwork tie holes shall be in filled with matching prepared cement/ fine
aggregate paste, to an accepted sample as specified.
g. Where rebates or features are shown, these shall also be the panel joints.
No other joints are permissible. The design of panel joints, rebates, striking
pieces and other elements are the responsibility of the Contractor but shall
be subject to the acceptance of the Engineer. Features shall be bedded on
mastic, but no mastic is permitted on the finished face work.
D. Joint Filler: 20 30% Asphalt impregnated fiberboard; of sizes detailed; ASTM D1751.
4.7 Executions
4.7.1 Coating
A. Coat forms with a form releasing agent before the forms and reinforcement are placed in
their final position. Do not allow coating to come in contact with reinforcement, water -
stops, construction and expansion joints. Apply coating as recommended in the manufac-
turer's printed instructions.
B. Remove surplus coating on form surfaces before placing concrete.
C. Do not allow excess coating material to stand in puddles in the forms, nor to come in con-
tact with concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed.
D. Locate and form expansion and construction joints.
i. Install expansion and contruction joint cover anchorage in accordance with manu-
facturer's printed instructions. Maintain correct elevation to allow cover to be flush
with floor and wall finish.
ii. Install joint fillers in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Use
primers of type recommended by joint filler manufacturer.

4.7.2 Preparation
A. It is the whole responsibility of the contractor to assure the following:

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

31
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 1. Design and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to
code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape,
line and dimensions with tolerances defined by BS standards.
2. Provide forms complete and of such strength and adequately braced so as
to prevent any spreading, shifting or settling when concrete is placed
to ensure finished concrete surfaces of the required tolerances.
3. Forms shall be tight to prevent leakage or washing out cement mortar
from concrete.
4. Framing materials at contractor option subject to meeting necessary
strengths and surface tolerances.
5. All wood forms sealers shall be of a type which will not harmfully af -
fect the appearance and/or utility of the concrete surface or the appli-
cation of the sealers, paint, vinyl fabric or any other finishes .In addi-
tion, form sealer shall prevent the development of bond or adhesion to
concrete.
4.7.3 Preparation
A. Construction of formwork
1. Locations of all daywork shall be carefully controlled, to the acceptance of
the Engineer
2. Deflection: Design formwork to limit any deflection, ensuring that it is rigid
enough to prevent high amplitude vibration during compaction. Allow no
variation in stiffness which will produce differences in vibration across the
form face
3. Camber: The Contractor shall make allowance for any deflection of form-
work that is likely to arise during construction, so that the hardened con-
crete conforms to the specified line and level.
4. Formwork shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects. The faces and
edges of formwork shall be clean and the formwork face shall be free of
projecting nails.
5. Formwork that has been previously used shall be repaired and the edge re-
sealed before it is erected. Formwork, which in the opinion of the Engineer
has deteriorated to an extent such that it will not produce the specified fin-
ish, shall not be used for that class or a higher class of finish.
6. Formwork shall be firmly supported and individual panels shall be rigid.
Joints between formwork panels, stop ends and adjoining concrete shall be
tight and shall not permit grout loss.
7. Formwork shall be cut in such a manner that reinforcement and built-in
components passing through the formwork are maintained in position; the
joint shall be tight and shall not permit grout loss. Installation of built-in
components shall be accurate, at least within the tolerance for that element
of the works.
8. Formers for profiled formwork, chamfers, splays, rebates, curved troughs
and other features shall be rigidly and evenly fixed to the formwork along
the complete length, shall not permit grout loss and shall provide a finish in-
distinguishable from the main formwork.
9. Formwork ties and components shall be fixed in such a manner that they do
not touch reinforcement or built-in components. Formwork ties and compo-
nents shall fit tightly against formwork faces and shall not permit grout loss.
10.
11. Formwork panels shall be the same size unless otherwise specified and shall
form a regular pattern consented to by the Engineer.The fair faced concrete
finish shall be regular, equal sized and without small infills as far as possible.
The number of makeup pieces shall be kept to a minimum.
12. Nails and holes left by formwork ties and components in concrete surfaces
shall be in line horizontally and vertically and shall form a regular pattern,
accepted by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

32
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 13. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, chamfers shall be provided for
all external angles of 90° or less in concrete surfaces with plain or fine fin-
ishes as indicated on the Design Drawings.
14. Formwork for curved concrete surfaces shall not be made up of a series of
facets.
15. The formwork shall be so arranged as to be readily dismantled and remov-
able from the cast concrete without shock, disturbance or damage. Where
necessary, the formwork shall be so arranged that the soffit form, properly
supported on props only, can be retained in position for such periods as
may be required by maturing conditions or Specification.
B. Inserts, Holes and Chases
1. Confirm all positions and details to ensure that alteration to and decisions
about the size and location of inserts, holes and chases are not made with-
out the knowledge and acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Fix inserts, or box -out as required , in the correct position before placing
concrete
3. Form all holes and chases. Do not cut hardened concrete without accep-
tance
4. Ensure that all fixings and holding down bolts, etc. are not disturbed or
damaged during construction.
5. Refer to the Shop Drawings and the Electromechanical Drawings for holes
with dimensions less than 150 mm
6. Ensure that all holes, inserts, chases, etc. are provided and that the forma-
tion of holes, inserts, chases, etc. meets the tolerances required for the par-
ticular services works concerned.
C. Built-in Components
1. Built-in components, cast-in items, void formers and box-outs shall be fixed
in position before concreting. Ensure that all tolerances are met in this re-
spect. Unless permitted by the engineer, void formers and box-out shall not
be used instead of built-in components. Polystyrene shall not be used for
void formers and box-outs, unless permitted by the Engineer.
2. Do not cut hardened concrete to provide holes or chases without the accep-
tance of the Engineer.
3. Correctly locate and secure pipe sleeves, inserts and ducts in place to meet
the requirements for tolerances for following trades.
4. Formwork molds shall be rigid and free from movement that shall affect
their performance with regard to tolerances or color of concrete. Allow for
all necessary mid-rib reinforcement of moulds.
D. Joints in Formwork
1. Ensure that all joints are left clean and true to the pattern shown on shop
drawings.
2. The overall jointing patterns shall be maintained and be regular throughout
the project.
3. Alignment of rebates and mould levelling, especially to the side of the
moulds, shall be levelled to give a finished surface of ± 1mm from the adja-
cent panel or joint.
4. Construct formwork, including joints in form linings and between forms and
completed work to prevent loss of grout, using seals when necessary. Se-
cure formwork tight against adjacent concrete to prevent formation of
steps.
5. Shop Drawings are required showing formwork layout, details and tempo-
rary works. Details shall include all features, bolt spacing, nail spacing, etc.
All panels shall be separately detailed. Typical details shall not be accept-
able. Setting out shall be to centre of columns.
E. Release Agent
1. Type: Indicate what release agent shall be used to assist in the striking of
the concrete and this shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
33
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Release agents shall be a type which will not stain or colour the concrete
2.
and which will not affect the bond between the concrete and subsequent
coverings. Release agents shall be of a type which will not affect the harden-
ing of the concrete.
3. Barrier paint, polyurethane varnish, wax or other materials shall not be used
instead of a release agent
4. Uniformity and Application: The same type and make of release agent shall
be used for all the works and shall be applied by the method and the rate of
application recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Cleaning Formwork
1. Remove all rubbish, chippings, shavings, sawdust, dirt or rust marks
from formwork before concreting in.
2. Treat all formwork with release agent in accordance with the manufac-
turer's recommendations in order to achieve the required finish.
3. Ensure that reinforcement of concrete at construction joints is not contami-
nated with release oil, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4. Use retarding agent only with the Engineer's agreement.
G. Final Fixings
1. Obtain acceptance of appearance of each elevation before tightening fix-
ings, filling bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing joints
2. Obtain acceptance for each bay of soffit panels before casting in situ top-
ping.
3. Where appropriate, tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recom-
mended in writing by the manufacturer. Do not overtighten restraint fixings
intended to permit lateral movement.
4. Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices shall be filled with a polyester mix,
be well tamped in and shall not be in the visible faces of the unit without
prior agreement.
H. Removal of formwork
1. Do not remove forms, shores and bracing until the concrete has gained
sufficient strength to carry its own weight and construction and design loads
which are liable to be imposed on it. The strength of concrete shall be veri-
fied by compressive test results to the requirements of the Engineer.
2. Formwork shall be removed in a manner not to damage the concrete, and at
times to suit the requirements for its curing and to prevent restraint that
may arise from elastic shortening or shrinkage.
3. For structural concrete made with Portland cement only, on the absence of
control cubes the period before striking shall be in accordance with the re-
quirements of BS EN 1992-1-1:2004. No formwork should be removed less
than 24 hours after concreting unless curing can be applied immediately to
the exposed concrete surface.
4. Where the concrete compressive strength is confirmed by tests on concrete
cubes stored under conditions that simulate the field conditions, formwork
supporting concrete in bending may be struck when the cube strength is 20
N/mm2 or three times the stress to which the concrete in bending will be
subjected, whichever is the greater. The stress shall be determined using an
elastic method and shall be based on the nominal loads at the stage under
consideration.
5. Props to Cantilevers shall not be removed before the counter balance con-
struction and the cantilever construction has been completed and fully ma-
tured.
6. The following is a table of minimum time that forms should remain in place
under ordinary conditions, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but
compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to delay the removal of forms if the concrete has not set suffi-
ciently so as not to cause any damage whatsoever.
a. Beam Soffits 15 days or 7 days if re-shored.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
34
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Columns
b. 24 hours.
Walls
c. 24 hours.
Sides of Beams 6 days.
d.
and Slabs
e. Soffits of Slabs 15 days or 7 days if re-shored
7. When formwork is removed within the seven (7) days curing period, particu-
lar care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the concrete, especially to
arise and features. The provision of suitable curing methods shall immedi-
ately follow the removal of the formwork and the concrete shall be pro-
tected from high temperatures by means of suitable shielding.
8. NOTE: It shall not be cured by the application of cold water. Where the fin-
ished surface has reentrant angles formwork shall be removed at the earli-
est time possible to avoid shrinkage cracks.
9. Any stripping sequence at an accelerated rate than that given above re-
quires agreement of the Engineer.
10. The Contractor shall submit for review his proposed method and sequence
of removal of props, taking into account the above minimum details for
striking formwork. Reference can be made to BS 5975:2008+A1:2011
4.7.4 Removal
A. Remove forms and falsework in a manner that will prevent damage to the concrete, and
ensure the complete safety of the structure.
B. Do not use pinch bars and similar tools to pry against, and damage concrete surfaces. Do
not remove forms until concrete has aged as follows:
11. Elevated slabs and beams, walls of circular tanks, foundation mats and base
slabs including construction and expansion joint bulkheads, and all walls 750
mm and thicker including construction and expansion joint bulkheads: 7
days minimum.
12. Grade beams, walls, construction and expansion joint bulkheads, and verti-
cal surfaces, except for walls and bulkheads specified in paragraph 3.03C.1:
3 days minimum.
C. Before form removal in accordance with paragraph 3.03C, concrete elevated slabs and
beams, walls of circular tanks, foundation mats, base slabs, and all walls 750 mm and
thicker shall have attained at least 70 percent of specified 28 day strength as determined
by the Contractor's testing laboratory firm, and also sufficient strength to support safely
its own weight and construction loads unless otherwise indicated or specified. Determine
concrete strength for form removal in conformance with ACI 301-96, paragraph 2.3.4.
D. Remove all tubular fiber forms in accordance with requirements for vertical surfaces
specified in paragraph 3.03C.2.
E. Reshore elevated concrete elements which support subsequent construction, when indi-
cated, or when the subsequent construction loads exceed the design live load of the ele-
vated concrete elements.
4.7.4.1 Reuse
A. Clean and repair the surfaces of forms that are to be reused to obtain the specified con-
crete finish. Withdraw all projecting nails and fill holes before reusing form material.
B. Do not reuse forms if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or split, frayed, de-
laminated, or other damage which would impair the quality of the concrete surface, or
prevent obtaining the specified concrete finish.
C. When forms are extended for successive concrete placements, thoroughly clean form
surfaces of mortar from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before re-
use.
D. Apply new form releasing agent to all form areas which will be in contact with concrete.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

35
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
5. Concrete Reinforcing:
5.1 General
A. Reinforcing steel bars for cast-in-place concrete, complete with tie wire.
B. Support chairs, bars supports, spacers for reinforcing Concrete.
5.2 References:
B. BS (British Standard)
BS 4449 Hot rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
Specifications for Scheduling, Dimensioning, Bending and Cutting of steel Rein-
BS 4466
forcement for concrete
BS 4482 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the Reinforcement of concrete.
BS 4483 Steel fabric for reinforcement of concrete.
BS 8110 Code of practice for design and construction of structural concrete.
C. AWS (American Welding Society)
AWS D12.1 Welding reinforcement steel.
D. ACI (American Concrete Institute)
ACI 301 Structural concrete for building.
ACI 315 American concrete institute manual of standard.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

36
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ACI 318 Building code requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
ACI SP-66 American Concrete Institute-Detailing manual.
E. ANSI (American National Standard Institute)
ANSI/ASTM A497 Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete.
F. CRSI (Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute)
CRSI 63 Recommended practice for placing reinforcing bars.
CRSI 65 Recommended practice for placing bar supports specifications and nomencla-
ture.
5.3 Quality Assurance:
A. Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance CRSI-63 and 65 unless specified other-
wise in this section.
5.4 Source Quality Control
1. Submit 3 certified copies of mill test report of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating
physical and chemical analysis.
2. Provide the Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforce-
ment. Notify of commencement and duration of shop fabrication, in sufficient time to al-
low for proper inspection.
5.5 Products
5.5.1 Materials
A. Reinforcing:
Item Minimum Yield Strength
Deformation high strength steel 280 Mpa
Deformation high strength steel 280 Mpa
1.
Reinforcing Steel: Deformed High yield wieldable steel bars shall comply with the BS 4482
, BS 4461 or BS 4483.
2. Reinforcing Fabric. 1. welded steel wire Fabric-ASTM A185 or BS 4483.
3. Accessories Materials
Chairs, bolsters bar supports, spacers, sized and shaped for strength and support of rein-
forcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom
to prevent vapor barrier puncture.
B. Quality Requirements
1. Steel reinforcement shall be hot rolled, high strength and high bond. Grade 420Mpa com-
plying with requirements of BS 4449, BS 4482, BS 4483 and BS 8110, deformed bars.
C. Accessory Materials
1. Tie Wire: Minimum 1.5mm gauge annealed type, or patented system accepted by the En-
gineer.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcing during construction conditions.
3. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers where adjacent to architectural concrete
surfaces: Plastic coated type; sized and shaped as required.
5.6 Executions
5.6.1 Placement and Fixing of Reinforcement
A. Place reinforcing bar supported and secured against displacement. Do not deviate from
true alignment.
B. Before placing concrete, ensure reinforcing bars are clean, free of loose scale, dirt, or
other foreign coatings which would reduce bond to concrete.
C. All reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position. At intersections the bars shall be bound
together with tying wire and the loose ends of the wire shall be turned towards the inside
of the member.
D. Reinforcement shall only be spliced or welded where shown on the drawings. All welding
procedures shall be subject to approval.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

37
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 E. Reinforcement shall be fixed in the positions shown on the drawings within a tolerance of
5mm or 5% of the lowest dimension of the cross-section of the member, whichever is
greater.
F. The concrete cover to the reinforcement shall be carefully maintained utilizing approved
spacers where necessary and Conforms to ACI 318 for Concrete cover over reinforce-
ment. The minimum concrete cover to all steel shall be:
1. 75 mm for foundation and elements in contact with earth/soil
2. 75 mm for retaining wall (wall face in contact with earth/soil )
3. 40 mm for retaining wall (inner face )
4. 40 mm for slab on grade
5. 25 mm for suspended slab
6. 40 mm for columns/beams/shear walls (clear cover from ties/stirrups)
G. Where concrete spacer blocks are used they shall not exceed 50mm square in section and
shall be precast from concrete of similar mix proportions and strength as the adjacent
concrete, except that the largest size of aggregate shall be 10mm.
H. Spacer blocks shall not be used where the concrete face will be visible in the finished
work, without the approval of the Engineer.
I. Each concrete spacer block shall be securely fixed to the reinforcement with wire or a
clip. The wire or clip shall be embedded in the center of the block so that it does not sub -
sequently cause rust marks on the concrete surface.
J. Supports and other subsidiary bars necessary to maintain the reinforcement in position
shall be provided at approved intervals with concrete cover not less than that of the adja-
cent reinforcement.
K. Fabric reinforcement shall be used in standard sheets where possible. Adjoining sheets
shall overlap by at least one rectangle or 55 diameters of the bar at the lap, whichever is
the greater.
L. Scaffold boards shall be provided to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by be-
ing walked upon during concreting or other operations.
M. During concreting operations a competent steel fixer shall be in attendance to ensure
that the reinforcement is maintained in the position as pouring and compaction pro-
ceeds.
N. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. Accommodate placement for formed openings.
O.
5.6.2 Measurements And Rates
A. Calculation of Steel reinforcement bars weight to be calculated as follows:

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

38
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
6. Cast-In-Place Concrete:
6.1 General
A. Section Includes: All cast-in-place concrete work shown on the drawings or inferable there from
and/or as specified in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work in-
cludes but is not limited to following:
a. All general concrete works and related finishes but is not limited to the following:
b. Slab on grade.
c. Suspended slab, beams and columns.
d. All concrete topping.
e. Concrete accessories
f. Testing
6.2 References:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A185-94a Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A416 Specification for Uncoated Seven Wire Stress Relieved Steel Strand for Pre-
stressed Concrete.
ASTM A615/A615M-94 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A767/A767M-94 Epoxy Coated Reinforced Steel Bars.
ASTM C29 Test Method for Unit Weight and Voids in aggregates.
ASTM C31-91 Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
ASTM C33-93 Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C39-94 Test Method for Compressing Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
ASTM C40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete.
ASTM C88 Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magne-
sium Sulfate.
ASTM C94-94 Ready-Mixed Concrete.
ASTM C114 Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
ASTM C117 Test Method for Material Finer Than 75-um (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggre-
gates by Washing.
ASTM C125 Definitions of Terms Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

39
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ASTM C127 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregates.
ASTM C128 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregates.
ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-size Coarse Aggregate by
Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
ASTM C142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates.
ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
ASTM C150 Portland Cement.
ASTM C156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C172-92 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
ASTM C227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement Aggregate Combinations.
ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.
ASTM C260-94 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C289 Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C332 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete.
ASTM C403 Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance.
ASTM C470.81 Specification for Molds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically.
ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C495 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete.
ASTM C641 Test Method for Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C979 Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
ASTM C1059 Specification for Latex Agents.
ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
ASTM E154 Methods of Testing Materials for Use as Vapor Barrier Under Concrete Slabs and
as Ground Cover in Crawl Spaces.
B. British Standards Institute (BSI)
BS 12 Portland Cement.
BS 410 Test Sieves.
BS 882 Aggregates from natural Sources.
BS 1204 Synthetic Resin Adhesives (Phenolic and amino Plastic) for wood.
BS 1305 Batch Type Concrete Mixers.
BS 1881 Methods of Testing Concrete.
BS 3148 Tests for Water for Making Concrete.
BS 3797 Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete.
BS 4027 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement.
BS 4251 Truck Type Concrete Mixers.
BS 4446 Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Reinforcement for Concrete.
BS 4449 Hot Rolled Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete.
BS 4461 Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
BS 4482 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete.
BS 4483 Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete.
BS 4550 Methods of Testing Cement.Please note that standards can be updated or re-
vised over time, so it's always a good idea to check for the latest versions and
revisions of the standards you are interested in.
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 211.1 Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
40
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Con-
ACI 304
crete.
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
ACI 309 Consolidation of Concrete.
ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary.
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
D. Applicable Provisions for Cast-in-Place Concrete Works
AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel (American Welding Society).
CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars (Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute).
ASHTO M148 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
CIRA Data Sheet Concrete Pressure on Formwork (Concrete Society Technical Report No.13).
ASHTO M182-94 Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf.
Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete
FHWA-RD-77-85
(Federal Highway Administration).
D. Performance
This specification Section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for the complete
project except where more stringent or specialized requirements are required. All work shall
be performed to secure for the entire project homogeneous concrete having the required
strength, surface finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of
weakness or other structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projec-
tions, offsets of plane and other defacements of concrete. The Contractor will be fully re-
sponsible for any defects or damage in the building arising from faulty materials or work-
manship and the costs of remedial measures in order to ensure that the completed work
complies with the Contract Documents. B. Design Requirements:
i. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract
Documents. No alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on
the Drawings will be permitted.
ii. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the concrete construction process and
be responsible for the complete manufacturing process for all concrete work.
All methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw materials and manu-
factured concrete shall be submitted for review by The Engineer prior to execu-
tion of the concrete work.
iii. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials
shall be properly selected, reviewed with The Engineer before use, and main-
tained during shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and techniques
shall be properly selected, reviewed with The Engineer before use, and main-
tained throughout the complete concrete construction phase. Adequate spare
equipment, parts, additional components and repair facilities shall be available
for all tools and equipment.

6.3 Submittals:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork and
reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and concrete placement techniques
and requirements.
1. Reinforcing shall be detailed on shop drawings reviewed and approved by The
Engineer.
2. The drawings shall be in such detail as to assure that difficulties in execution of
the work in the field are minimized.
3. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing loca-
tions sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories.
Include on the shop drawings, schedules and diagrams to indicate bends, sizes
and lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

41
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 4. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations,
shall show all floor openings, wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor, wall
openings and sleeves for all mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be
coordinated with the respective trades and shown on these shop drawings in
accordance with
the criteria indicated on the Contract Drawings and contained in the various ap-
plicable Sections of the Specification.
5. No work shall be fabricated until all shop drawings have been reviewed and ap-
proved by the Engineer (with corrections and resubmittals as required by the
Contract Documents). After review and approval by the Engineer, furnish all
copies needed for fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.
6. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for furnishing and installing all materi-
als called for or required by the Contract Documents even though these materi-
als may have been omitted from the reviewed shop drawings.
7. Submit shop drawings for all formwork showing locations of joints, tie bolts,
cones, dummy cones, openings, chamfers, inserts, fittings and accessories for
the approval of the Engineer before fabrication of formwork.
8. Submit design calculations in accordance with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 4,
Para.4.2, wherever required for the supporting system of the formwork along
with the shop drawings for the supporting system, for approval of the Engineer.
B.
Samples:
1. Provide samples of all concrete materials of every type proposed for use including
component parts of prefabricated formwork systems and manufacturer's technical
literature relating thereto. Prepare mock-ups and carry out such tests on the pro-
posed prefabricated formwork systems as may be required by The Engineer in order
that he may be satisfied as to the system's suitability.
2. Furnish reinforcement and accessories for sample panels and mock-up portions of
the structure as required using all materials and techniques as they will be used in
actual construction.
C. Mill Tests:
Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement, steel reinforcement
strands. Certifications for Admixtures. As specified under admixtures.
D. Test Reports:
3. Submit preliminary test results for The Engineer's approval at least three weeks prior
to the beginning of the work. In addition to the test reports specified under "Quality
Control", submit the following directly to the Engineer:
a Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 Section 6).
b Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88).
c Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641).
d Air Entrainment Test Reports (ASTM C260).
6.4 Quality Assurance
A. Submit proposed name of independent Testing Agency for the approval of The Engineer.
Employ at no extra cost to the owner the approved Testing Agency to perform all tests
and submit reports specified in this section. Approval may be withdrawn at the discre-
tion of the Engineer and an alternative Testing Agency approved.
B. Preliminary Tests (Trial Tests)
1. Target Mean Strength: The concrete mix shall have at least the required minimum
cement content and mean strength greater than the required characteristic strength
by at least the current margin. The current margin shall be taken as the lesser of:
i. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate
batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials
and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same
plant under similar supervision, but not less than one sixth (1/6) of the
characteristic strength for concrete of grade 150 or not less than 37.50
kg/m2 for concrete of grade 200 or above.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

42
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ii. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate
batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials
and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6
months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than
one third (1/3) of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 150
or not less than 75 kg/cm2 for concrete of grade 200 or above.
If enough data is not available to satisfy the requirements of either (a)
or (b) above mentioned, the margin shall be taken as two-thirds (2/3) of
the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 150 or 100 kg/cm2 for
concrete of grade 200 or above. When required characteristic strength
approaches maximum possible strength of concrete a smaller margin
but not less than 75 kg/cm2 shall be permitted. Evidence shall be sub-
mitted to The Engineer for each grade of concrete showing that at the
intended workability, the proposed mixed proportions and manufactur-
ing method will produce concrete of required quality. Declare any
change in source of material and any change in cement content, nature
and source of each material, full details of tests on trial mixes, proposed
quantities of each ingredient per cubic meter of fully compacted con-
crete.
2. To establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work, unless specified
otherwise, make preliminary tests and prepare design mixes, in accordance with ACI-
301, Chapter 3, Paragraph 3.8, Method 1 or Method 2, in a design laboratory accept-
able to the Engineer.
3. In addition to the tests required to establish the suitability of materials, make one
test for each design mix to verify that the total Chloride (CI) ion content and the total
Sulphate (SO3) content of each mix is within the specified limits. Perform Chloride
tests in accordance with "Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chlo-
ride Ion in Concrete" as contained in Report No. FHWA-RD-77-85 published by U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, perform Sulphate
(SO3) tests in accordance with ASTM C114.
4. Trial Mixes
iii. Where trial mixes are requested by the Engineer, three (3) separate
batches of concrete shall be made using materials likely to be typical of
the proposed supply and preferably under full scale production condi-
tions.
iv. Sampling and testing shall be strictly in accordance with B.S.1881. The
workability of each batch of concrete shall be determined and three (3)
cubes made from each batch of concrete for test at 28 days. A further
three (3) cubes from each batch shall be made for test at earlier age.
The trial mix proportions shall be approved by The Engineer if the aver-
age strength of nine (9) cubes tested at 28 days exceeds the specified
characteristic strength by the appropriate margin or if nine (9) cubes
tested at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this
amount. The appropriate margin is the margin as given in Clause 1.05
B.1 herein for concrete of nominally similar proportions and of similar
materials to the trial mix. For this purpose if the trial mix does not dif -
fer by more than 30 kg/m3 of cement from a reference mix of similar
workability, then the proportions may be regarded as "nominally simi-
lar" and the current margin for the reference mix can be taken as the
appropriate margin for the trial mix. If trial mixes re required to
demonstrate that the maximum free water/cement ratio is not ex-
ceeded, two batches shall be made in a laboratory with cement and sat-
urated sand surface dry aggregate known from past records of the sup-
pliers of the materials to be typical. The proposed mix proportions shall
be accepted only if both batches have the correct cement content and
free water/cement ratio below the maximum specified value at the pro-
posed degree of workability.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
43
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 5. Have a representative present when the preliminary tests are made. Whenever a
change of band or source for any of the concrete ingredients occurs, additional "pre-
liminary tests" will be required and the cost of these additional tests shall also be
borne by the Contractor.
C. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection
1. Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection and tests at the plant and in the
field. Notify The Engineer one day in advance of concrete work. Inspection, field
tests and sampling of concrete taken from the job will be carried out under the direc-
tion of The Engineer Likewise the conducting of tests carried out by the Contractor
shall be under the direction of The Engineer.
2. Concrete shall be produced in accordance with BS 5328. BS 5328 requires that tests
are made on the constituent materials in accordance with the relevant British Stan-
dard, (refer to Part 2 of this Section), and that control tests are made on concrete to
ensure compliance with the specified requirements.
3. When tested, the concrete shall meet the appropriate requirements specified in BS
5328, i.e.:
i. Characteristic compressive strength.
ii. Specified mix proportions.
iii. Minimum or maximum cement content.
iv. Maximum free-water/cement ration.
v. Workability.
vi. Air content of concrete.
vii. Temperature of fresh concrete.
viii. Density of fully compacted concrete.
4. Rate of sampling and testing shall be as specified and/or as directed by The Engineer
the cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
5. Facilitate sampling procedure and provide labor and material as required. Notify The
Engineer when reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate any inspection he
deems necessary. Submit checking sheets before placing concrete. Do not place con-
crete until these inspections have been completed and all deficiencies reported by
The Engineer have been corrected to The Engineer satisfaction.
6. Supply all moulds required for tests as described below, using moulds of the same
type and manufacture for making all test specimens. If field tests show excessive
slumps or other violations of the Contract Documents, the entire batch of concrete
from which the sample in question was taken will be rejected and shall be removed
from the site at the Contractor's expense. The Engineer will inspect all concrete op-
erations in the plant and in the field.
7. If ready-mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be ac -
companied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to checking by The Engineer at
the plant and which shall contain the following information.
a. the strength of the mix of concrete being delivered.
b. The exact time the cement and aggregate were discharged into the delivery
truck. If upon reaching the job the concrete cannot be placed within the
time limits stated, or if the type of concrete delivered is incorrect, The Engi-
neer will reject the load and it shall be removed from the site at the Con-
tractor's expense.
c. List of admixtures and concentration percentage.
8. Under the supervision and direction of The Engineer the Contractor will take speci-
mens of each class of concrete from different locations on the job as follows:
a. At least twelve (12) specimens for each 40 cubic meters or fraction thereof
of each class of concrete and in any case not less than twelve (12) speci-
mens for any one day's operations.
b. Test specimens will be taken at pouring locations to give a fair average of
the concrete in the part of the construction indicated.
c. Samples will be obtained in accordance with BS 1881.
d. At least two (2) slump tests: ASTM C143.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

44
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 e.
Testing shall conform to BS 1881 in making, curing and subsequently han-
dling test specimens, except as modified herein. Cubes shall be engraved
with the date of placing and the serial number of the cubes (1 to12) plus a
universal serial number representing the number of the pour.
f. The cubes shall be placed in laboratory storage on Site under moist curing
conditions at approximately temperature 21o C within 24 hours after
moulding and maintained therein until ready for testing at the testing agen-
cies Laboratory. Three (3) cube specimens will be tested at seven days, and
if the seven day strength is deficient, the Contractor will be notified. Three
(3) cubes will then be tested at 14 days, three (3) cubes at 28 days, and the
remaining three (3) cubes will be tested as directed by The Engineer , having
been cured with curing compound for 28 days.
g. Two (2) unit weight and yield tests: ASTM C138.
9. Under the supervision and direction of The Engineer The Contractor will take speci-
mens of each class of concrete, and an independent Testing Agency, approved by the
Engineer, will perform one test for each 100 cubic meters to verify that the total
Chloride ion content and the total Sulphate content are each within the specified
limits. As soon as the concrete is no longer plastic, but in no event more than 24
hours after placement, the Testing Agency will perform tests in accordance with the
procedures herein specified under Paragraph 1.04E.
10. Keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a pro-forma approved by
The Engineer Such records shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer
D. Change of Current Margin: When the results of a sufficiently large number of tests show
that the previously established margin has significantly varied, a change in the current
margin used for judging compliance with the specified characteristic strength may be ap-
propriate. Recalculation of the margin shall be carried out as before, but the adoption of
recalculated value will not generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18%
when based on tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when based on tests on
100 separate batches, or less than 5% when based on tests on 500 separate batches.
E. This recalculated margin if adopted becomes the current margin for the judgment of
compliance with the specified characteristic strength of concrete. E. Testing Plan:
1. Each three (3) cubes shall be made from a single sample taken from a randomly se-
lected batch of concrete. The sample shall be taken from the point of discharge from
the delivery vehicle. The characteristic strength of concrete shall comply with the
following requirements:
a. The average strength determined from any group of four (4) consecutive
sets of test cubes exceeds the specified characteristic strength by not less
than 0.3 times the current margin.
b. Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified strength. The
current margin shall be taken as given in Paragraph 1.05B. If only one cube
result fails to meet the second requirement mentioned above, that result
may be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from
which that cube was taken, provided the average strength of the group sat-
isfied the first requirement. If more than one cube fails to meet the second
requirement or if the average strength of any group of four (4) consecutive
tests cubes fail to meet the second requirement, then all the concrete in all
the batches represented by all such cubes shall be deemed not to comply
with the strength requirements.
2. Enforcement: When the average strength of four (4) consecutive test cubes fail to
meet the first requirement mentioned in the testing plan, the mix proportions of
subsequent batches of concrete shall be modified to increase the strength. The Engi-
neer shall decide as to what action may be taken for test cubes that fail to meet the
requirements mentioned. In estimating the quality of the sub-standard concrete and
in determining the action to be taken the following shall be considered.
a. The validity of test results and confirmation that specimen sampling and
testing have been carried out in accordance with BS 1881. Concrete shall be
included by the strength of specified characteristic strength, together with
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
45
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 the cement content, in comparison with the specified minimum cement
content.
b. The mix proportions actually used in concrete under investigation.
c. The actual section of the structure represented by the test cubes.
d. The possible influence of any reduction in concrete quality in the strength
and durability of this section of structure.
The Engineer may require tests to be carried out on the hardened concrete in the struc -
ture, apart from other tests mentioned in the Contract Documents. The cost of all such
tests and making good will be borne by The Contractor irrespective of the test results.
Where tests show that concrete is below specified strength, remove all, or a part of, the
concrete in all of the batches deemed not to comply with the strength requirement as di-
rected by The Engineer Full cost of removal of low strength concrete and its replace-
ment with concrete of proper specified strength shall be borne by the Contractor, with-
out any additional cost.
3. Strength: Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by
tests made on cubes at an age of 28 days. Not more than 5% of the cube test results
shall be allowed to fall below the characteristic strength of concrete.
F. Lightweight Concrete
1. Mix Design: Design lightweight concrete mix to produce the following physical prop-
erties taking into consideration the actual site conditions (i.e. location, temperature,
pumping heights, etc.).
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 21 kg/cm2 at 28 days.
a. Use minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
b. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by the relevant stan-
dards and/or aggregate manufacturer.
2. Testing: Minimum of 5 Nos. samples of the proposed mix design are to be prepared
and tested in accordance with ASTM C495 for approval by The Engineer , prior to
proceeding with the work. The minimum oven-dry density of all the samples shall
not be less than 700 kg/m3 and the maximum density shall not be more than 800
kg/m3. The minimum compressive strength of all samples shall not be less than 50
kg/cm2.
G. Product Handling
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6.
H. Environmental Conditions:
I. Hot Weather Concreting: Refer to Clause 1.02 "STANDARDS" (ACI 105)..
6.5 Products
6.5.1 Materials
The products and manufacturers specified herein, are specified for the purpose of establishing mini-
mum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be consid-
ered acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
A. Cement:
1. Alkali Content For All T-ypes of Cement: Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide
(Na2O) (ASTM C227).
2. Ordinary Cement: BS12 or ASTM C150, Type 1 or K.S.S. 36, non-staining.
3. Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement: BS4027 or ASTM C150, Type V.
4. Sulphate resisting cement shall be used as directed by The Engineer in all work below
the ground floor level which is in contact with soil or waterproofing or protection
board or vapor barrier.
5. Cement shall originate from sources and manufacturers acceptable to The Engineer
and shall be delivered in sealed bags. Only one brand of cement shall be used for
each type of cement. When received at the batch plant, all bags shall be intact, and
cement shall be completely dry. Cement exposed to moisture or wetting of any king
during shipment or storage shall not be used on the job.
6. Stale cement or cement which cakes, or lumps shall not be used.
7. All cement stored at site shall be kept thoroughly dry and shall be stored in water-
tight sheds on a floor raised at least 200mm above ground. Cement stacks shall have

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

46
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 labels indicating dates of manufacture and arrival at the storage site. A maximum of
fifteen (15) bags shall be stacked if the storage period is not more than four (4)
weeks and eight (8) bags if the storage period is over four (4) weeks but not more
than three (3) months. Any cement stored for more than three (3) months shall not
be used without the explicit written permission of The Engineer
8. When tests performed on field samples, subsequent to the original approval tests,
show that the cement does not comply with the Specifications, the entire consign-
ment from which the sample was taken shall be rejected. Rejected cement shall not
be permitted in storage areas or on the Site and shall be removed within twenty four
hours.
9. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to sun. Cement temperature shall
not exceed 50oC.
10. All Type V Cement shall have tricalcium aluminate content not exceeding five percent
(5%).
B. Aggregate:
1. In general, aggregate shall comply with BS 882, "Concrete Aggregates from Natural
Sources", or ASTM C33, and shall be graded in accordance with these requirements,
irrespective of whether concrete is mixed on site or elsewhere. The Contractor shall
nominate the source of supply and shall provide grading curves of aggregate for ap-
proval.
2. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and crushed stone, crushed
rock or gravel. Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each size of coarse aggre-
gate gradation shall be used. Each aggregate type shall be from a single consistent
source.
3. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has good
drainage. Stockpiles shall have walls separating adjacent materials and shall be cov-
ered to preclude segregation or intrusion of foreign materials and to preserve the
gradation. Sufficient storage shall be maintained to assure placement of concrete at
the necessary rate. Use properly constructed sheds to protect aggregates from di-
rect sun radiation and from blowing sands.
4. Aggregates shall be hard, durable clean and free from adherent coating and dust and
when directed by The Engineer , shall be washed and sieved to remove delirious sub -
stances.
5. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites, coal, mica,
shale or similar particles which may reduce the strength or durability of the concrete.
Aggregates shall not contain any material that am be chemically active with rein-
forcement or that may react to cause efflorescence or that may be alkali reactive.
6. Alkali reactive limestone aggregates such as "Dolomitic" shall not be used.
7. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other sources of sup-
ply shall be determined at least once weekly. The results of such tests shall be re -
ported to The Engineer and shall be used to check whether the gradings are similar
to those of the samples used in the establishment of the samples used in the estab-
lishment of batch weight used.
8. Supplier's certificate shall be submitted to The Engineer for approval of the source of
aggregate.
9. Aggregate for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for color as ap-
proved by The Engineer and shall come from a single source.
10. All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less than the following
maximum salt contents as acid soluble chlorides and sulphates. The table also shows
the maximum salt content allowed in the mixed concrete. Aggregates for colored
concrete must be approved by The Engineer prior to use.
Chlorides Sulphate
Percent of weight of Fine aggregate 0.06 0.4
Percent of weight of Course aggregate 0.03 0.4
Total percent in concrete as 0.1 (OPC)
Percent by weight of cement 0.2 (SRPC) 4

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

47
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 11. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand or crushed gravel sand and shall comply
with ASTM C33 or BS 882 "Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources: having hard
and durable particles or other inert materials having similar characteristic conform-
ing to the following requirements: a. Fineness Modules: 2.4 to 3.0 ASTM C125.
I. Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.25 from value u++sed in
establishing mix proportions. If greater deviation, the use of such ag-
gregates
II. shall be discontinued until suitable adjustments in mix proportions can
be made and reviewed.
III. Magnesium Sulphate Soundness: Max 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5 cycles.
IV. Potential Reactivity: Not reactive ASTM C289.
V. Content of Clay Lumps: Max 1% by weight ASTM C142.
VI. Chloride Content: Max 0.1%
VII. Gradation requirements as follows:
Size of sieve opening (square opening) Percentage by weight
passing ASTM C33, C117
9.5 100%
4.75 95-100%
2.36 80-100%
1.18 50-85%
0.6 25-60%
0.3 5-30%
0.15 0-10%
0.075 0-5%
VIII. Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permit-
ted upon submission of relevant data and review by The Engineer
IX. Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C40) and
other foreign matter.
12. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone. The
crushing shall be regulated so that the material retained on the No.8 (2.36mm) sieve,
at least 90 percent by weight shall consist of pieces with at least one fractured face
and at least 75 percent by weight shall consist of material with at least two fractured
faces. In addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
a. Magnesium Sulphate Soundness: Max 5% loss. ASTM C88, 5 cycles.
b. Potential Reactivity: Not Reactive ASTM C289.
c. Chloride Content: Max 0.1%
d. Abrasion: Max 10% loss ASTM C131, 100 revolutions.
e. Flat and Elongated Particles: 3:1 max. 30% ASTM C125 5:1 max 10%.
f. Content of Clay Lumps: Max 0.5% by weight ASTM C142.
g. Shale: Max 2% by weight.
h. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min 2.58 ASTM C125.
i. Graduation requirements as follows:
Size of sieve opening (square open- Percentage by weight passing
ing) ASTM 33, 117
Size Size Size
(37.5mm) (25.4mm) (19mm)
(50.0mm) 100
(37.5mm) 95-100 100
(25.4mm) 60-85 95-100 100
(19.0mm) 35-70 60-85 95-100
(12.7mm) 20-50 25-60 60-75
(9.5mm) 10-30 15-45 200-55
No. 4 (4.75mm) 0-5 0-10 0-10
No. 8 (2.36mm) - 0-5 0-6

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

48
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permit-
ted upon submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer
j. The maximum size of aggregates shall be (25.4mm) for columns, walls
and basement slabs, and (19.0mm) for slabs and beams. In addition,
the maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 20 percent of the nar-
rowest member that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed 75 percent
of the clear spacing between adjacent steel reinforcement or between
reinforcement and adjacent formwork.
13. Lightweight Aggregates shall comply with ASTM C332.
C. Water:
1. Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be clean, fresh and
free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or
organic matter. Water shall be filtered to remove any color or residues present due
to contamination from water piping or transportation or storage methods.
2. Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328.
3. Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148.
D. Admixture:
1. Suitable admixtures of the following approved types may be incorporated in the con-
crete only with the prior written approval of the Engineer a. Water reducing set re-
tarders.
a. Set retarders.
b. Water reducing agents.
c. Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete.
2. The Engineer shall be informed about the usage of following materials:
a. The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-
dosage.
b. Chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.
c. Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when
used at manufacturer's recommended dosage.
d. Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.03% by mass of the ce-
ment, nitrates, calcium chloride, sulphates and sulphates shall not be
used.
e. Admixtures submitted for The Engineer's approval shall be certified in
writing by the manufacturer to be in compliance with BS 5075 or ASTM
C494.
f. Air-entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete shall comply with
ASTM C260 or BS 5075, Part (2).
g. The type of admixture selected in accordance with the above men-
tioned standards must be to the approval of the Engineer all admix-
tures must be mutually compatible.
h. Admixture used in the work shall be obtained from reliable manufac-
turers whose products have previously been used successfully in
Yemen or on other international projects in countries having similar cli-
mate to Yemen.
i. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions and recommendations and shall be certified by the
manufacturer to be suitable for use during hot weather extremes. Ad-
mixtures shall be stored safe from adverse temperatures in accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions or recommendations.
j. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by The En-
gineer, shall be verified by trial mixes with the cements, aggregates
and other materials to be used in the works before final approval is
given.
k. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must al-
low in his Tender for testing the type of admixture he proposes to use.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

49
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 l. Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the manufac-
turer's recommended dispensers-no adding of admixture by hand is al-
lowed.
m. The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have controlled
sources of individual components such that the total mix meets the re-
quirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified otherwise,
the total Chloride (CI) ion content in the entire mix shall not exceed
0.20 percent of the weight of cement when SRPC is used and 0.1 per-
cent when OPC is used. The total water-soluble Sulphate (SO3) con-
tent in the entire mix shall not exceed 4 percent SO3 of the weight of
cement in the mix.
The total Calcium Chloride (CaC12 ) content in the total mix shall not
exceed 0.01 percent of the weight of cement.
n. The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Ma2O equivalent shall
not exceed 3 kg/m3. All sources of alkali shall be taken into account
for calculating the total alkali content. In particular the contribution of
Sodium Chloride whether from aggregate or from mixing water must
be included.
E. Bar Supports
1. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of The Engi -
neer for support of the bottom layer of reinforcing in the slab only. The blocks shall
be of minimum size and made from cement sand small aggregate mix to match sur-
rounding concrete strength, appearance and durability.
2. Other support devices and spacers shall be of such materials and of adequate
strength and approved design as to be durable and so as to prevent displacement
and corrosion of reinforcing steel and prevent discoloration and spalling of concrete
cover. The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of the following: a. High density
plastic.
a. Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet.
b. Stainless steel.
3. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of a type to suit the vari-
ous conditions encountered and must be capable of supporting a 140 kg (1.37 KN)
concentrated load without measurable permanent deformation of the reinforcement
or indentation of the supporting surface.
F. Curing Materials:
1. Liquid membrane Compound: AASHTO M148 or ASTM C309, Type 1-D with fugitive
dye and Type 2; formulated to disintegrate aft 28 days, and guaranteed not to affect
the bond of applied finishes.
2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171, 025MM thick, opaque black.
3. Reinforced Waterproof Building Paper: ASTM C171, opaque.
4. Burlap: AASHTO M182.
5. Water: BS 5328 and BS 3148.
6. Methods for determining the efficiency of curing compounds shall be in accordance
with ASTM C156.
7. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Ten-
der for testing the type of curing compound he proposes to use.
G. Formwork:
1. Location of joints must be submitted to The Engineer for approval.
2. Prefabricated formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided the
manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations are followed and the sys-
tem has been approved by The Engineer Joints between sections of prefabricated
forms shall be taped unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and pro-
vided always, in the case of such recommendation, the forms are water and mortar-
tight to the Engineer 's satisfaction.
H. Forming Coating: B.P. CCM3 (British Petroleum) or B.P CM# ® (British Petroleum) or Cal -
form (Caltex) or Form wax of a type which does not import any stain to concrete nor in-

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

50
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 terfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant, waterproofing material applied to any
concrete surface and must be approved by the Engineer .
I. Form Ties: For securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finished work, use
tie screws with removable plastic ones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires
or Series 300 stainless steel snap ties. For all other forms, either bolts or wires may be
used. Use ties of such type that when forms are removed, no metal is closer than 40mm
from the finished concrete surface.
J. Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Non-Metallic approved by the Engineer.
K. Roof topping and Floor:
1. Polyethylene Sheeting: ASTM C171, 0.10mm thick, opaque black.
2. Reinforced Waterproof Building Paper: ASTM C171, opaque.
3. Burlap: AASHTO M 182.
4. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
a. Superior concrete bonder, Dayton Superior Corp.
b. Sonnocrete, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
c. Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg
6.5.2 Mixes
A. Proportioning of Concrete
1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, or BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4. Assume full re-
sponsibility for the strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of con-
crete. Cement, fine aggregate and the various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be
measured by weight.
2. Water/Cement Ratio: comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4, or ACI 301, Chap-
ter 3, Para. 3.8, Method 1 or 2. The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete shall
not exceed the specified maximum value by more than 5% of that value. If a maxi-
mum water/cement ratio has been determined the ability to comply with that re-
quirement at a suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes. Maxi-
mum water/cement ratio may be judged from workability tests and approved by The
Engineer.
3. Cement Content: The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be less than
the specified minimum value minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified
maximum value plus 5% of that value. The cement content may be determined from
samples representative of any batch of concrete provided suitable test is used to
measure the cement content of fresh concrete to an accuracy of +5% of the actual
value with a confidence of 95% and approved by The Engineer Table 6.1 of BS 8110.
Part 1: 1985 gives the minimum cement required when using a particular size of ag-
gregate in a Portland cement concrete, to provide acceptable durability under appro-
priate conditions of exposure. The reduced minimum cement contents shall only be
used when trial mixes have verified that concrete with maximum free water/cement
ratio not greater than that given for a particular condition can be consistently pro-
duced and it is suitable for the conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer
shall determine the degree of exposure to be adopted for mix design.
4. Requirement for Fresh Concrete: Workability of concrete shall be such that the con-
crete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing so that after compaction it
surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork. Workability shall be
assessed by means of the slump test or compacting factor test. An acceptable value
for the means slump for each concrete mix shall be agreed with The Engineer and a
value of 65mm can be taken as a guide. Following are the limits of workability of con-
crete for these tests:

Slump ± 25mm or CF ± .03 where required value is 0 or more

04 where the required value is less than
0.9 but more than 0.8.
.05 where required value is 0.8 or less.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

51
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights
of aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for moisture content typical of the aggre-
gates being used. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be with ±3% of the
quantity of cement, water or total aggregates being measured and within ±3% of the
quantity of any admixture being used. All measuring equipment shall be maintained
in a clean, serviceable condition. The mixer shall comply with the requirements of BS
1305 or BS 4251 where applicable. The mixing time shall be not less than that used
by the manufacturer in assessing the mixer performance.
5. Adjustment to Mix Proportions: during production adjustments of mix proportions
will be made in order to minimize the variability of strength and to approach more
closely the target mean strength as approved by The Engineer Such adjustments are
regarded as part of the proper control of production but the specified limits of mini-
mum cement content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be maintained.
B. Classes of Concrete
1. Schedule of Concrete Types
Grade Characteristic Type and Use
Cube
Strength (28
days)
20 200 kg/ cm2 Blinding Concrete, screed
25 250 kg/ cm2 Slab on grade
35 350 kg/ cm2 All other structural elements
Foam concrete 50 kg/ cm2 As per drawings
C. Lightweight Concrete
1. Mix Design: Design lightweight concrete mix to produce the following physical prop-
erties taking into consideration the actual site conditions (i.e. location, temperature,
pumping heights, etc.).
a. Use minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
b. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by the relevant stan-
dards and/or aggregate manufacturer.
2. Testing: Minimum of 5 Nos. samples of the proposed mix design are to be prepared
and tested in accordance with ASTM C495 for approval by The Engineer , prior to
proceeding with the work. The minimum oven-dry density of all the samples shall
not be less than 700 kg/m 3 and the maximum density shall not be more than 800
kg/m3. The minimum compressive strength of all samples shall not be less than 50
kg/cm2. Cure lightweight concrete as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Roof topping and Floor:
1. Grout: 1 Part cement to 1 part sand, with sufficient water to make stiff slurry.
2. Bond Coat: 1 Part cement to 1¼ parts sand to 2 parts coarse aggregate mixed with
bonding agent as approved by the Engineer. The amount of water shall not exceed
19 liters per 50kg bag of cement or as recommended by manufacturers.
3. Top Coat: Same mix as specified for the bond coat.
4. Class of Concrete: Grade 300-350 kg/cm2 characteristic cube strength (28 days)
5. Mesh Reinforcement: Shall conform to BSI or to ASTM A185.

6.6 Executions
6.6.1 Mixing Concrete
A. Ready Mixed Concrete
1. Comply with ASTM C94. Batched mix only shall be used on the site and any account
mixing at site is not permitted.
2. Mixing additional water for consistency during transit or any time of pouring con-
crete is not permitted.
3. Discharge the concrete completely at the Site within one hour after the introduction
of the water to the aggregates. In hot weather reduce this time limit so that no stiff-
ening of the concrete shall occur until after it has been placed.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

52
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 4.
Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has been inter-
mingled with the aggregates.
B. Batch Mixing at Site (if permitted by Governmental authority having jurisdiction)
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, or ACI 301, Chapter7, Paragraphs 7.2 and 7.5.
2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency
will not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency which can be readily placed
without segregation.
3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and dis-
pensing the admixture.
C. Hand Mixed Concrete: this is not permitted.
D. Roof topping and Floor:
1. Provide batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at project site.
Equip batch mixer with a suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and a water
measuring device. Use only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement
and water into a uniform mix within specified time and of discharging mix without
segregation.
2. Ready mix topping may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. When acceptable,
furnish ready-mixed topping complying with requirements of ASTM C94.
6.6.2 Joints and Embedded Items
A. Construction and Control Joints:
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Paragraph 6.12, or ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph
6.1 and BS 5337.
2. Construction joints other than when formed at movement joints shall be kept to a
minimum possible consistent with convenience of construction and design consider-
ation. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to locations of construction
joints.
3. Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration shall be
given to their exact location. The location of construction joints shall be subject to
agreement between The Engineer and The Contractor before any work commences.
Construction joints shall be at right angles to the general direction of the member
and shall take due account of shear and other stresses.
4. Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the
concrete against which new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and shall
be roughened to the extent that the largest aggregate is exposed but not disturbed.
Care shall be taken that the joint surface is cleaned immediately before the fresh
concrete is placed against it.
5. Saturate the cleaned surface with water and flush with a coating of 1:1 ½ cements
and grout. Place new concrete before grout has attained its initial set. Clean hori-
zontal construction joints and pour the cement-sand mortar over joints in walls to a
depth of 25mm before depositing concrete. In walls, do not space construction
joints more than 15 meters apart, unless otherwise shown.
6. Care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the joint. This con -
crete shall be well compacted and vibrated.
B. Embedded Items
1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraphs 6.4 and 6.5.
2. Set anchorage devices by line and transit, and coordinate the locating of all anchor-
age devices to be set for the accommodation of the work of other trades.
3. Locate anchor bolts and/or threaded type inserts and bars as shown on the Drawings
and on shop drawings. Obtain necessary templates from the mechanical trades as
required for the setting of anchor bolts and other items for mechanical equipment,
as required.
4. Assist other trades in the installation of piping, pipe sleeves, conduit and similar
items where such items are to be installed in concrete. Provide frames to security
hold anchor bolts and anchorage devices in place during construction, and take care
that no displacement occurs during the placing of concrete. Under this Section fur-

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

53
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 nish and set items not furnished by other trades using approved standard type items
suitable for their intended purpose.

6.6.3 Placing Concrete

A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.1 for preparation before placing and
with BS 8110, Section 6, Para 6.5 and 6.8. Notify The Engineer 24 hours before each
placement so that the forms and reinforcement may be examined. Do not place concrete
until inspection has been made or waived.
B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed at shade air temperature below 2C° on a rising
thermometer, or at a shade air temperature below 3 C° on a falling thermometer.
When the shade air temperature is 32 C° and rising, special precautions shall be taken
during concrete operations, such as shading of the aggregates, formwork and plant, cool-
ing of the mixing water or other methods approved by The Engineer so that the tempera-
ture of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 30 C°. The temperature of the con-
crete can be reduced by cooling the water and the aggregate.
C. Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the
sun to the satisfaction of The Engineer for a period of 24 hours. Concrete is not to be
mixed and placed when the shade air temperature is 38 C° or above.
D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened con-
crete and foreign matter. Check forms for construction and detail. Secure reinforcement
sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of water and all debris. Sprin-
kle with water any semi-porous sub-grade to eliminate suction. Water shall be removed
from excavation before depositing concrete, such water shall not be allowed to wash
over newly formed concrete.
E. Comply with ACI Standards 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete
shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods
which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the re-
quired workability. Concrete shall be placed and compacted without addition of water.
Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of formwork
and damage to faces of formwork.
F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing the
forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas tremie tubes only
equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking shall be of variable lengths so
that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one meter and a sufficient
number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is approximately level at all
times. Where alternative provisions can be made, which are acceptable to The Engineer,
then low slump concrete can be dropped vertically through greater heights than one me-
ter.
G. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or other means
during the operation of placing and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement,
around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free
from voids and which will have required surface finish when formwork is removed.
H. Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until
the expulsion of air has practically ceased and there is no secretion of ingredients. Care
shall be taken that the vibrator is not used any closer than 75mm from the formed sur-
face. Where permanent precast concrete formwork is used in the structure, its energy
absorption should be taken into account when deciding on the method of vibration to be
used and The Engineer's prior approval shall be obtained in respect thereof.
I. Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall not be
placed in the forms.
J. Concrete topping: Before application the surfaces shall be thoroughly witted and
brushed over with a coat of neat cement grout. The topping shall be placed before the
grout has started to set.
K. Slope surfaces to drains where indicated. Slope shall be as indicated on Drawings.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

54
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
6.6.4 Curing
A. General
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.6 and 6.8 and ACI Standard 301, Chapter 12.
2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have
satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a minimum distor-
tion, be free of executive efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage, undue
cracking in the structure. Insulate the concrete so that it is maintained at a suitable
temperature and prevent excessive moisture loss from the concrete. Curing shall be
appropriate to different members and products. Where necessary special care shall
be taken to ensure that similar components are cured under the same conditions.
3. Curing shall be promptly commenced, be total in coverage and continued without in-
terruption.
B. Curing Methods
1. Ponding with Water: Effective for flat surfaces. Curing water shall not be more than
11oC cooler than the concrete and shall be free of substances that may stain or dis -
color concrete.
2. Saturated Material: Saturated material shall be held in close contact with concrete
surfaces and maintained in moist condition so that a film of water remains on the
concrete surface throughout the curing period. Saturated materials shall be kept
wet for a minimum of seven days after stripping.
3. Intermittent Spraying with Water: Care shall be taken that newly finished concrete is
not damaged by water erosion. If spraying is done at intervals, concrete surfaces
shall not dry out between applications of water.
4. Slabs and flat surfaces shall be cured by flooding. Flat concrete surfaces shall be cov-
ered immediately after concrete is placed, tamped and leveled, with polyethylene
sheet and flooded with water as soon as initial hardening of concrete occurs. Cover-
ing surface shall follow progress of concrete placement until the whole surface is
covered and flooded. Polyethylene sheet may be removed after 24 hours and regu-
lar flooding maintained for a minimum of seven (7) days.
5. Use special thermometers of sufficient length of stem to monitor the concrete tem-
perature of the raft foundation slab as soon as concrete is placed to the required
level. Monitor temperature of concrete for seven (7) days and provide The Engineer
with daily records.
6. Curing Compounds:
a. Where there is lack of adequate supplies of clean water, curing membrane
solution shall be applied at the coverage rate recommended by the manu-
facturer (two coats, one at right angles to the offer), immediately after plac-
ing concrete.
b. Concrete surfaces shall be damp when the coating is applied. Curing com-
pounds shall not be used if bond is necessary such as in base slab of two
course floor.
c. Conventional curing compounds shall not be used if a special finish is to be
applied. In such cases, special resin solutions that do not affect adhesion of
finishes may be used as approved by the Engineer
C. Curing Periods: Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for all cast-in-place con-
crete. At the discretion of The Engineer the curing period may be extended.
6.6.5 Striking of Formwork
A. Comply with BS 8110: 85, Section 6, Para. 6.9.3 or ACI 301, Chapter 4, Para.4.5.
B. Do not remove forms of supports until the concrete has thoroughly hardened and has at-
tained sufficient strength to support its own weight and construction live loads to be
placed thereon. Without damage to the structure. Do not disturb forms or supports until
the concrete has attained at least 40% of design strength for side forms and 80% of de -
sign strength for bottom forms. Be responsible for proper form removal and replace any
work damaged due to inadequate maintenance or improper or premature form removal.
C. The removal time may be decreased with The Engineer's approval where surface temper-
ature of concrete is 16oC and above refer to Table 6.6. Section 6 of BS 8110, Part I.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
55
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. Protect the newly placed concrete from high and low temperatures using suitable means
of insulation for the duration of the curing.
E. Care shall be exercised in form removal to prevent chipping of corners and other damage.
Experienced foremen shall supervise form removal.
F. Removal of bottom form linings may be permitted, provided the removal is planned se-
quentially so that props are replaced as each lining is removed, and work is carried out
during the presence of The Engineer .
G. No new permanent structure shall be constructed on any part of the erected structure
while the latter is still supported by formwork unless walls are built above another wall
carried on a properly supported base. This requirement does not prohibit the use of
props to take the load of more than one level of framing.
6.6.6 Tolerances
A. Comply with BS 5606 or ASTM E1155, Standard test method for determining floor flat-
ness and levelness, unless noted 117-81, Part 5, unless noted otherwise.
6.6.7 Cleaning Finished Exposed Concrete Surfaces
Efflorescence stains, oils, grease or any unsightly accumulation of foreign materials that
are visible on the exposed exterior and/or interior surface of finished concrete, shall be
removed. Such action may cover all exposed concrete or when irregular lapping can be
avoided, only such parts as are affected by the stains or other unsightly appearances. No
such remedial action shall be taken without the approval of The Engineer.
6.6.8 Patching
Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 9.
6.6.9 Schedules - Finishing
A. General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and monolithic
slabs true and level within a tolerance of 3mm in 3 meters and measured with a 3 meter
straight edge placed in any direction at any location.
B. Monolithic Floor Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding
and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and
fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats
of the disc type and trowel smooth with two steel troweling operations. Do the second
troweling after the concrete has become so hard that no mortar will adhere to the edge
of the trowel. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true to a
maximum tolerance of 3mm in 3 meters. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to re-
ceive the following:
i. Hardener and Sealer.
C. Motor Float Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by temping, screeding, and
preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine
material will be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of the
disc type. Leave floors/roofs with a smooth finish and true to a maximum tolerance of
3mm in 3 meters. Motor float finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following: a.
Membrane Waterproofing.
D. Rough Slab Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force the aggregate away
from the surface, then screed with straight edges to produce a reasonably true and uni-
form surface. Rough slab finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following:
i. Floor beds.
E. Wood Float Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force aggregate away from
the surface, then screed with straight edges to bring surfaces to the required lines. While
the concrete is still green, wood float to a true and uniform plane to a 3mm in 3m toler -
ance with no coarse aggregate visible and apply a medium stiff broom finish striated uni-
formly at right angles to traffic pattern and in the direction indicated. Apply hardener
and sealer to the following:
i. Driveway: Ramps and Parking.
F. Fair Face Finish: Interior Exposed Concrete Surfaces of Slab, Beams, Columns and Walls.
Unless otherwise shown, leave a smooth fair face finish, even-textured and free of blem-

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

56
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ishes. Repair or replace defective areas, as directed. As soon as the face forms are re-
moved, remove all fins and other projections carefully, level offsets and grind where nec-
essary, Repairing, replacing and pointing and filling voids shall be done to The Engineer's
satisfaction. Patch as specified under paragraph "Patching". Refer to architectural draw-
ings to determine surfaces scheduled to receive paint.
6.6.10 Lightweight Concrete
A. Place lightweight concrete in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using
equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and loss of air content.
Density of lightweight concrete shall be 1680 Kg/m3 as specified. Maintain thick-
ness and slopes as shown on Drawings. Leave top surfaces in acceptable condi-
tion to receive subsequent application.
B. Cure lightweight concrete as recommended by the manufacturer

6.6.11 Topping and roofing Concrete

A. Cover the wet substrate surfaces with grout, applied with force and brushed in
to assure full coverage.
B. Apply bond coat not less than 16mm thick immediately after application of grout
and bring to true lines, levels and profiles. Compact and roughen the bond coat
to form a key for the top coat.
C. Before the bond coat has set, apply the top coat to such thickness that the total
of the work measured from substrate to finished surface will be as shown, less
only thickness of finish covering.
D. General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and
monolithic slabs true and level within a tolerance of 3mm in 3 meters and mea-
sured with a 3 meter straight edge placed in any direction at any location.
E. Monolithic Floor Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping,
screening, and running the wood float in one direction of the slab. When the
slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine material will not be worked
to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of the disc type and
trowel smooth with two steel troweling operations. Do the second troweling
after the concrete has become so hard that no mortar will adhere to the edge of
the trowel. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true to
a maximum tolerance of 3mm in 3 meters.
F. Wood Float Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force aggregate
away from the surface, then screed with straight edges to bring surfaces to the
required lines. While
G. the concrete is still green, wood float to a 3mm tolerance with no coarse aggre-
gate visible and apply a medium stiff broom finish to receive the specified fin-
ishes.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

57
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
7. STONEWORK:
7.1 General
Work Included masonry wall and Natural Marbel tiles.
7.2 References:
BS 5628-1:2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Structural use of unreinforced masonry.

BS 5628-2:2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Structural use of reinforced and pre-
stressed masonry.
BS 5628-3:2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Materials and components,
design and workmanship
BS 8000-3:2001 Workmanship on building sites. Code of practice for masonry
BS 12 Portland Cement
BS 3416 Black bitumen coating solutions for cold application.
BS 3148 Methods of tests for water for making concrete.
BS 1199 and 1200 Specifications for Building Sands
ASTM C 144 Specification for aggregate for masonry
ASTM C 476 Specification for mortal for unit masonry
ASTM C 97 Test methods for absorption and bulk specific gravity of natural building stone.
ASTM C 99 Test methods for modules of rupture of natural building stone.
ASTM C 114-88 Test methods for chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
ASTM C 119 Definitions of terms relating to natural building stone
ASTM C 170 - 09 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone
ASTM C 207-91 Specification for hydrated line for masonry purposes.
ASTM C 241 Test method for abrasion resistance of stone subjected to foot traffic.
ASTM C 503-89 Specification for marble dimension stone
ASTM C 880-92 Test method for flexural strength of dimension stone
ASTM C1201-91 Test method for structural performance of exterior dimension stone cladding
system by uniform static pressure difference.
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

7.3 Submittals:
E. Samples:
4. Submit two (2) sets of each type of stone, full size units as selected by the Engineer
to the project site, in sufficient number to indicate the full range of color, texture and
each type of finish. One of each of the duplicate samples approved by the Engineer

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

58
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 will be retained by him at the project site, the other being returned to the contractor
for his guidance. Colors and types of stone-dressings are as mentioned in BOQs.
5. The following physical data on all proposed stone shall be submitted by the
Supplier:
a. Analysis of mineral composition.
b. Analysis of chemical composition.
c. Thermal sufficient of expansion.
d. Absorption.
e. Specific Gravity.
f. Modulus of Rupture.
g. Abrasion Resistance.
F. Shop Drawing.
9. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate dimensions and locations of joints.
10. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate dimensions and locations of walls.
Indicate all units of stone, i.e. sills, lintels, copings, etc. their configurations
and size; materials and types anchorage items and their locations.
11. Submit stone field erection drawings.
G. Mockup
2.Furnish and install a typical stone floor application required for the project, at an
area designated by the Engineer. The panel shall be constructed for the Engi-
neer's approval showing 1.5m x (15cm to 25 cm) for parapet. The floor installa-
tion shall include a corner condition indicating coping stones, etc., as shall be in-
structed by the Engineer.
3.The approved mock-up shall constitute the quality of work to be expected
throughout the entire project, and shall remain in place for visual inspection un-
til no longer needed as directed by the Engineer. The removal and disposition of
the mock-ups shall be done by the Contractor at his expense without additional
cost .
4.All work shall include setting and jointing of all stone including final cleaning as
specified herein for the actual work and as required for approval. Construct as
many mock-ups until approval by the Engineer has been obtained.
5.Other stone used in foundations or not exposed to view: No size requirement un-
less noted otherwise in this work section.
7.4 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Packing and Loading: finished stone shall be carefully packed and loaded for shipment us-
ing all reasonable and customary precautions against damage in transit. No material
which may cause staining or discoloration shall be used for blocking or packing.
B. Site storage: Upon receipt at the building site or storage yard, the stone shall be stacked
on timber or platforms at least 300mm above the ground, and extreme care shall be
taken to prevent staining during storage. If storage is to be for a prolonged period, poly-
ethylene or other suitable plastic film shall be placed between and wood and finished
surfaces, and shall be used also as an overall protective covering. Salt shall not be used
for melting of ice formed on pieces, or for any purpose involving its contact with the
stone.
C. Defective stone: any piece of stone showing flows, cracks, or imperfections such as vents,
sand and clay holes, shelly bars, shakes, mottle, seams or starts upon receipt at the stor -
age yard, or at the building site, shall be discarded and removed from the work site, and
at the contractor's own expense.
7.5 Products
7.6 5.1.1 Stone Materials
E. General
c. Stone shall be of good quality, sound, free from cracks and defects, seams or starts
which may impair its structural integrity, durability, appearance and/or function,
Color, texture and finish shall be within the range of samples approved by and the
engineer.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

59
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 All stone shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and facility to
d.
meet the specified requirements. Cutting and finishing shall be performed by using
approved equipment to process the material promptly on order and in strict accor-
dance with the specifications. Evidence to this effect shall be provided by the Con-
tractor.
e. Stone rejected for noncompliance with the submitted samples or the requirements
of this Specification shall be replaced with material acceptable to the Engineer. Re-
placement shall be prompt and at the Contractor's own expense. Inspection of stone
by the engineer shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities to perform all work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
F. Dimensions
3. Cut all stonework accurately to shape and dimensions shown on the final approved
shop drawings.
4. Do all necessary cutting for anchors, support plates, shelf angles, and dowels, etc.
G. Source of stone supply
Ensure the stone quarry or supplier can provide all stone required for the project
without the need to find alternative supplies.
H. Beds and joints
Stone beds and joints surfaces shall be cut square from the face for the entire
thickness of stones. Stone joints dimensions as shown on the approved drawings.
I. Backs of pieces
Backs of all pieces of stone shall be sawn to approximately true planes with maximum
variation of 1.5mm in thickness from that indicated on the approved shop drawings.
J. Temporary support
Provide support as necessary to the stone while the mortar is curing, using bracing, joint
spacers, or both.
K. Exterior & interior special shapes
All specially shaped pieces of stones shall be constant in profile throughout their
length, in strict conformity with details shown on approved shop drawings.
L. STONE FOUNDATIONS:
Stone footings: Construct the footing course entirely of through stones, and if stepping is
necessary, overlap the stepped courses at least 400 mm.
Subfloor stone foundation walls with Minimum foundation wall thicknesses: Supporting
cement bock walls 150 mm thick: wall thickness 400 mm and 400 mm height.
Bond pattern: Provide through stones as follows:
-All stones in top and bottom courses. - Elsewhere as header units.
M. Damp‐Proof Courses for Stone Foundation
Embossed Polyethylene sheeting. Install sheeting at base of all walls to stop moisture ris-
ing up wall structures.
Insulation the exposed face to the soil with two coats of hot bituminous, adding a 4 mm
bitumen roll under cement block wall and on the top of masonry wall

N. Jointing and Pointing for Stone Foundation

Joints Size (mm): Not less than 3mm or more than 5mm for dimensioned stonework. Size
may vary for non-dimensioned stonework from 10mm to 30mm. Joint size should not ex-
ceed this without approval of the Engineer.
Jointing material: Mortar with a strength less than the stonework. Lime putty where iden-
tified on drawings for special dimensioned stonework.
Pointing material: Colored mortar or mortar as above, refer to Schedule or drawings. Lime
putty where identified on drawings for special dimensioned stonework.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

60
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Taping: Protect the stonework surface on each side of the joint using 50 mm wide mask-
ing tape or equivalent means. On completion of pointing remove the tape and remove
any stains or marks from the stonework surface
7.7 Executions
7.7.1 Conditions at Site
H. The Contractor is required to conduct a thorough examination of all surfaces and
parts of the structure that will receive the stone units installation. If any condi-
tions are found that could negatively impact the proper and timely completion
of the work, the Contractor must notify the Engineer in writing. The Contractor
should not proceed with the installation until these conditions have been cor-
rected and are deemed acceptable by the Engineer.
I. Verify all measurements and dimensions coordinate the installation of inserts for
this work and coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades.
Give particular attention to the location and size of cutouts required to accom-
modate mechanical, electrical, and other work or adjoining construction, in ac-
cordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.

7.7.2 Stone Installation

7.7.2.1 Mortar Materials
Cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM specification C‐150 Type 1 or
similar approved standard for normal Portland cement.
- White cement: Iron salts content = 1%.
- Off-white cement: Iron salts content =2.5%.
For the parapet, it should be an approved adhesive material.
Sand: Fine aggregate with a low clay content selected for grading, sharp and free
from efflorescing salts. River or pit sand should be sharp, angular, hard, clean un-
coated particles free from clay and organic impurities.
Water: Water to be used for the mixing of mortar should be clean and free from oil,
acid, alkali, salts, organic materials or other substances that are harmful to the mor-
tar mix.
Crushed stone: Fine aggregate consisting partly or wholly of crushed stone, made
from material of the same type as the stone facing.
Measurement of volume: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or
boxes. Do not allow sand to bulk by absorption of water.
Mortar Standard and ratio of mix for all mortar shall be M ‐400 (1:3), M ‐300 (1:4), M ‐
250 (1:5) and M‐200 (1:6). Provide minimum water.
Mortar mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer unless the Engineer specifically
permits hand mixing. If hand‐mixing is done, the operation shall be carried out on a
clean watertight platform and cement & sand shall be first mixed dry in the required
proportion to obtain a uniform color and then the mortar shall be mixed for at least
two minutes after addition of water.
Cement Mortar shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used in the work within 30
minutes. Mortar, which has taken initial set, shall not be used, nor shall it be re‐mixed
with fresh mortar.
7.7.2.2 Field Quality Control
1.Test mortar and grout in accordance with specification specified in this section.
2.Check completed surfaces that are to receive covering to ascertain units are
accurately placed and not damaged.
3. Repair or replace defects prior to application of covering.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

61
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
7.7.2.3 Protection
Stone shall always be protected from drippings, welding spatter and damage during
construction. Where necessary or directed, substantial non-staining wooden or other
approved covering shall be placed to protect the work. Heavy polyethylene film shall
be used between stone and wood. Maintain all protection until removed to permit fi-
nal cleaning of stonework.

7.7.2.4 Cleaning Protection

A.Clean soiled surfaces using non-acidic solution of type which will not harm stone,
mortar joint materials, or adjacent surfaces.
B.Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
7.7.2.5 Final Inspection
A.Finished surfaces shall show no objectionable visual distinction in jointing, bed-
ding, plane color, texture, pattern, and finish. All stones which in the opinion of
the Engineer do not provide the required uniformity shall be relocated, or re-
moved and replaced with new stone units to the satisfaction of the Engineer
and at the Contractor's own expense.
B. All defective stone units shall be replaced with new stone units, except that minor
damages may be repaired when approved by the Engineer. Repairs, when ap-
proved, shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When the repairs
to stone are unsatisfactory to the Engineer, the stone shall be replaced with
new stone. All repairs and all replacements of defective and unsatisfactorily re-
paired stone shall be performed at the Contractor's own expense.

8. Blockworks:
8.1 General
Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following:
- Forms for blocks prior to casting blocks.
- Completed blocks prior to use.
- Damp-proof courses, in position. - Built-in items, in position.
Cement Blocks shall be of precast concrete and may be manufactured on or off the Site under the su-
pervision of the Engineer. Blocks from an approved manufacturer or block factories in Yemen/ Aden
may be accepted at the discretion of the Engineer.
The casting of all Automatic blocks shall be made in approved molds and to the required dimensions,
and thoroughly rammed and consolidated by mechanical tamping and vibration. All blocks shall be
sound, square-edged, true to shape and size, and free from cracks and other defects.
8.2 References:
BS 12 Portland Cement
BS 882 Specification for aggregate.
BS 3148 Methods of tests for water for making concrete.
BS 6073 Part 1 and part 2. Precast concrete masonry units
BS 1199 and 1200 Specifications for Building Sands
BS 5628-1:2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Structural use of unreinforced masonry.
BS 5628-2:2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Structural use of reinforced and pre-
stressed masonry.
BS 5628-3:2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Materials and components,
design and workmanship
BS 8000-3:2001 Workmanship on building sites. Code of practice for masonry
BS 1449: Part 2 Specification for stainless and heat-resisting steel plate
BS 729 Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron & Steel Articles

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

62
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ASTM C 144 Specification for aggregate for masonry
ASTM C 33 Concrete aggregates
ASTM C 90-946 Specification for hollow load bearing concrete masonry unit
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
ASTM C 476 Specification for mortal for unit masonry
ASTM C 1555 Standard Practice for Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Masonry
ASTM C 1386 Standard Specification for Precise Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (PAAC) Wall
Construction Units
ASTM A 153 Specification covers standards for zinc coatings applied through hot-drip process
on iron and steel hardware.
ASTM A 615 Deformed and plain carbon steel bars for concrete reinforcement

8.3 Submittals
A. Samples
1. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
document sample of each unit masonry hereinafter listed. Samples will be re-
viewed for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is
the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Samples to be submitted are as
follows:
For each the two types of blocks.
2. Submit certified copies of the reports of all tests specified herein. Test reports
shall be accompanied by notarized certificates from the manufacturer certifying
that the tested material is of the same type, quality, manufacture and makes as
that proposed to be supplied.
B. Shop Drawing.
1. Submit shop drawings indicating details of reinforcement, anchors,
inserts, joints, connections to adjoining work or materials. Also include eleva-
tions
indicating setting out and placement of all joints, openings, cut-outs, etc.
H. Mockup
1.Prior to the installation of unit cement block, and preceding pre-installation
conference, provide a sample wall mock-up for each type of unit cement block
work.
2.Provide each sample wall panel using materials, together with bond and joint
tooling, shown or specified for final work.
3.Build each sample wall panel mock-up at the site, as directed, of full thickness
and approximately 1-meter-high x 1.5 meter long, unless otherwise shown,
indicating the proposed texture and workmanship to be expected in the
completed work.
4.The approved mock-up shall constitute the quality of work to be expected
throughout the entire project and shall remain in place for visual inspection un-
til no longer needed as directed by the Engineer. The removal and disposition of
the mock-ups shall be done by the Contractor at his expense without additional
cost .
5.Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of visual qualities of each sample panel before pro-
cessing with the final work.
6.Retain each sample panel mock-up during construction period as a standard for
judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until
work is completed.
7.Ensure coordination between cement block work and concrete work such that all
inserts and flashing reglets required for the proper installation of masonry work
are correctly pre-installed.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

63
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 8.Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the
cement work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any condi-
tions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not pro-
ceed with the installation of masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
8.4 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during the course of
the work.
B. Protect all masonry material during shipment, storage and construction against wetting
and soilage or intermixture with earth or other types of materials.
C. Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings that will reduce
or destroy bond.
D. Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank platforms off the
ground in dry locations.
E. Deliver masonry unit material, other than bulk material, to the project site in Manufac-
turer’s unopened containers, bundles, pallets or other standard packing devices, fully
identified with name, type, grade and size.
F. The stacks of blocks shall not exceed 5 blocks high and are to be well watered. No blocks
shall be used for building purposes until 21 days after manufacture.
8.5 Project Condition
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. When the ambient air temperature is more than 30 sash °C in the shade, and
the
relative humidity is less than 50%, protect the masonry from direct exposure to
wind and sun for 48 hours after installation.
2. Do not lay masonry units having a film of water on their surfaces.
Do not mix mortar or lay units while shade temperature is above 40 C on a ris -
ing.
thermometer or above 43 C on a falling thermometer.
3. Do not allow temperature of fresh mixed mortar to exceed 32°C. Take suitable.
measures to ensure this.
B. Protection:
1. Protect partially completed masonry walls against weather when work is not in
progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining
membrane. Extend membrane at least 600 mm down both sides of walls and
anchor securely in place ensuring that there is free air flow sufficient to prevent
heat build-up.
2. Normal weathering of exposed work during construction is permitted, provided.
other activities and conditions do not interfere and result in an unacceptable
condition.
8.6 Products
8.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
No specified manufacturers for this tender, However Products and materials provided by
the contractor shall comply with the requirements of contract documents and subject to
the Employer and Engineer approval and the Engineer and the Employer have the right to
reject any submittal without any liability towards the contract.
Hollow concrete blocks shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 6073 Part 1.
Blocks shall be tested for compressive strength whenever required by the Engineer. For
each test 12 blocks shall be selected by the Engineer .

8.6.2 Mortar Materials

A. Portland Cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I or B.S. 12, ordi-
nary, nonstinging, without air-entrainment, natural color or white as required to
produce the required color of mortar or grout.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S or BS 890.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
64
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 C.
Mortar Aggregates: ASTM C 144 or BS 1200, except for joints less than 6 mm,
use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18 mm).
D. Water: Clear and free of deleterious materials, salts, etc. which would impair the
work.
8.6.3 Mortar and Grout Mixes, Load-Bearing Masonry
A. Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that proportions are controlled
and
accurately maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition.
B. Mortar: Comply with the proportions and physical requirements of ASTM C270
for Type S.
C. Grout: Comply with the proportion requirements of ASTM C476 for the follow-
ing types, as applicable:1. Fine Grout. 2 . Coarse Grout.
D. Do not use mortar or grout which has begun to set or if more than 11-~ hours
have
elapsed after initial mixing.
E. Do not add plasticizers or other admixtures to mortar or grout materials speci-
fied.
8.6.4 Mortar Mixes, Non-Load-Bearing Masonry:
A. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 270, except limited to the mix materials herein
before
specified and the following cement/ lime ratios by volume; wherein sand (in
damp
condition) equals 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and refer 3.04 (A) of
this section for the location where to use the type of mortar:
1. Type M: Not more than 1/4-part lime per part Portland cement.
2. Type S: Not more than 1/2-part lime per part Portland cement.
3. Type N: Not more than 1 part lime per part Portland cement.
B. Curing block: After casting, blocks shall be kept well-wetted with water for a pe-
riod of ten (10) days and are not to be used before thirty (30) days from their
manufacture. After building, concrete walls shall be kept well-wetted for a pe-
riod of seven (7) days. In addition, In a moisture-controlled atmosphere or in an
autoclave at normal temperature and pressure, and limit moisture absorption to
35% of saturation at time of delivery and until time of installation. Comply with
ASTM Type I classification.
C. Standard Finish: Provide concrete block units with exposed faces of the manu-
facturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise shown or specified.
D. The average compressive strength for solid blocks shall be not less than 3.43
N/mm2 and the minimum compressive strength of any solid block shall be not
less than 2.5 N/mm2. The average compressive strength for the gross is of hol-
low blocks shall be not less than 3.43 N/mm2 and the minimum compressive
strength for the gross area of any hollow block shall be not less than 2 N/mm2.
E. Weight of concrete hollow block shall be as follows:
▪ 100 mm thickness, weight per block between 9 and 10 kg.
▪ 150 mm thickness, weight per block between 14 and 16 kg.
▪ 200 mm thickness, weight per block between 18 and 20 kg.
8.6.5 Refer to drawings and wall type schedules
Provide blocks as shown, complying with type classifications, weights, grades
and cure requirements as hereinafter specified and the following general re-
quirements:
1. Do not use blocks which have chips, cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots
or other substances which might stain finishes where faces or ends will
be exposed.
2. Obtain blocks from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of
uniform texture and color, for each type required, for each continuous
area and visually related areas.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
65
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3.
Face Dimensions: Manufacturer's standard, nominal 400 mm long x
200 mm high, unless otherwise shown.
4. Provide special shapes wherever shown and wherever required using
concrete grade 25 or 30 (25 or 30N/mm2) to build corners, wall-caps,
sills, lintels, jambs, control joints and expansion joints, and for other
uses where necessary to provide a complete installation in accordance
with the highest standard of workmanship, including reinforcement
steel bars.
5. Solid Concrete Blocks: ASTM C90-94b or BS 6073 Part 1, using concrete
aggregates complying with ASTM C33 or BS 882, with dry net concrete
weight of not less than 2000 kg/cu.m. Type 1 or the equivalent grade
of BS 6073, Parts 1 and 2.
8.6.6 Metal Ties, Anchors and Reinforcement
A. Concrete insert:
1. Unit Type: Furnish unit type inserts of cast iron or malleable iron, or fabri-
cated from not less than 12 gauge (2.6 mm) steel with 458 g/sq m hot-dip
zinc coating after fabrication (ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or BS 729 Table 1).
2. Dovetail Strap Type: Furnish dovetail slots with 22 mm wide flat bar an-
chors
formed from 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized steel, with 6 mm upturned
end or 12 mm diameter hole located within 12 mm of end. Anchor to ex-
tend to within 37 mm of face of masonry units.
a. At Contractor's option, No. 9 gauge (3.7 mm) galvanized wire triangular
tiebacks with metal tabs for insertion into dovetail slots may be provided
in lieu of flat bar anchors.
B. Anchoring Devices: Provide bolts, straps, bars and rods of the type and size
shown, but fabricated from not less than 16 gauge (1.5 mm) sheet metal or 9
mm diameter rod stock unless otherwise shown.
1. Fabricate devices from steel with mill galvanized or hot-dip zinc coating.
C. Reinforcing Bars: Steel reinforcing bars, complying with ASTM A 615, intermedi-
ate
grade, size as shown or specified herein, free from mill scale and excess or loose
rust
deposits.

8.7 Executions
8.7.1 Examination
J. Examine Surfaces: Inspect existing surfaces and ensure that they are satisfactory
for
work to proceed as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer
and do not proceed until rectified to satisfaction of the Engineer.
K. Verify all measurements and dimensions coordinate the installation of inserts for
this work and coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades.
Give particular attention to the location and size of cutouts required to accom-
modate mechanical, electrical, and other work or adjoining construction, in ac-
cordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.

8.7.2 Preparation
Removal is not to damage steel and is to be effected using tools and methods
approved by the Engineer. Saws must be fitted with depth gauges to prevent
damage to steel.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

66
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
8.7.3 Workmanship
A. Manufacturers Recommendations: Comply with the manufacturers printed in-
structions and recommendations for the installation of each type of masonry
product, unless otherwise shown or specified.
B. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown on the in-
tended
contract drawings, except for single skin masonry walls which may be built to
the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness
shown on the intended contract drawings.
C. Chases: Build chases and recesses as shown and as may be required for the work
of
other trades. Do not cut horizontal or diagonal chases in load bearing work. Pro-
vide not less than 200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings and
between adjacent chases and recesses.
D. Construction Openings: Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to
be
installed at a later date. Complete masonry work after equipment is in place us-
ing
materials identical with those immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Construction Joints: Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; tooth-
ing will not be permitted. Before new work is started clean exposed surfaces of
set masonry and remove loose blocks units and mortar prior to laying fresh ma-
sonry.
F. Cutting Blocks: Use motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp
corners. Cut blocks as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining
work neatly. Use full blocks without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of
less than half size blocks at corners, jambs and any other locations. Do not use
chipped or broken blocks.
G. All masonry unit where requires pointing shall be fair faced and flush pointed
unless
otherwise noted. All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, fair face, with flush joints
to receive paint whether mentioned or not.
H. Regarding the basic workmanship, it should comply with the clauses of BS8000
Part3.
I. Blocks shall be laid in true and regular courses on a full bed of mortar of 10 mm
average thickness but not exceed 13 mm and 12mm with reinforced block-
work , exclusive of any key in the jointing surfaces of the blocks. Sufficient mor -
tar shall be used in bedding and Jointing to ensure that all keys are solidly filled.
J. Carry up walls regularly. No portion shall rise more than one meter above adja-
cent portions and at changes in levels work shall be raked back.
K. Courses shall be properly levelled . Plumb perpendicular joints , quoins , jambs
and angles as the work proceeds.
L. Build walls which are to be left un-plastered with selected blocks with un-
chipped arises (cut with a masonry saw where cut edges is inevitable and will be
exposed to view) and finish with a fair face . Point horizontal joints with a neat
roded joint and vertical joints with a near flush joint as the work proceeds.
Samples of face work should be done, representing the range of variation in ap-
pearance and to obtain Engineer approval before continuation of the work.
M. Walls which are to be plastered shall have the joints raked out to depth of 15
mm.
N. The maximum height of laying is 1.2 m per day.
8.7.4 Laying Masonry Walls and Partition
A. Mortar Types, General: Except as otherwise shown or specified use Type S mor-
tar for exterior masonry work and Type N mortar for interior masonry work.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

67
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 1. Use Type M mortar for special structural requirements where shown, and for
grouting reinforcing steel in masonry lintels unless concrete is shown.
B. Bond: Use running bond for all single-skin masonry walls unless otherwise
shown. In
multiple-skin walls, bond skins together with header blocks wherever possible,
unless otherwise shown. Where skins cannot be masonry bonded, use wire ties
of the type and spacing shown, unless horizontal joint reinforcing provides the
tie between skins. Where type and spacing of wire ties is not shown provide ei-
ther continuous or individual type ties, installed so that double wires will be
spaced not more than 600 mm o.c. horizontally.
C. Laying Procedure for Walls
1. Do not wet the concrete block units.
2. Shove block units into place with a full bed of mortar in both horizontal
and
vertical joints.
3. Lay-up walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced
and
coordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of
more than 1/800 in any direction are unacceptable.
4. Build bearing plates, masonry anchors, flashings, sleeves, and other mis-
cellaneous items into masonry as work progresses. Fill-in solid with ma-
sonry around built-in items.
5. Delay filling between top of non-bearing walls and structural beams or
slabs above until structure has been fully loaded with the major items of
dead load to be supported thereon, so as to cause deflections nearly
equal to the final condition.
6. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown or of standard type if none
is shown. Anchor masonry work to all abutting structural members.
Space anchors 600 mm centers at vertical and overhead support loca-
tions, and 600 mm centers both ways behind masonry veneer work, un-
less otherwise shown.
7. Maintain uniform joint width except for minor variations to maintain
bond
alignment. Parge back-up masonry with a minimum of 12 mm mortar
while laying face blocks. Except for cavity wall construction leave no
voids between blocks. Slush and grout back joints against other work as
blocks are shoved into place.
8. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are concealed or to be covered
with other materials except applied rendering, unless otherwise shown.
9. Rake out joints of masonry walls which are to receive applied rendering
or similar formless material.
10. Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless otherwise shown.
11. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement in all masonry walls, unless
specifically noted or specified to be omitted. Space reinforcement 600
mm centers vertically unless otherwise shown or specified. Lap rein-
forcement a minimum of 150 mm at ends and do not bridge control and
expansion joints with reinforcement except at wall openings. Use match-
ing prefabricated "T" and "L" sections of reinforcement at corners and
wall intersections to provide continuity. Center reinforcement in wall to
provide a minimum mortar cover of 15 mm at side rods. a. At all open-
ings of more than 300 mm width provide joint reinforcement in 2 hori-
zontal joints, approximately 200 mm apart, both immediately above the
lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend the reinforcing a minimum
of 600 mm beyond the opening, bridging control joints, if any
D. Block Lintel: Provide block lintels wherever shown, and wherever openings in the
blockwork of more than 300 mm are shown without concrete, structural steel or
other
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
68
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 supporting lintels. The size of lintel is (20cmx20cm) with steel reinforcement (2Ø14
top and 2Ø14 bottom, and ties 1Ø8 @20 cm), it should be embedded at least 20 cm
for each side.
E. Tie Beams: If the height of any masonry wall exceeds 4 meters, provide an RCC tie
beam (of 200Kg/cm2 strength) having 20 cm height and width equal to that of the
masonry
wall. Provide 1% reinforcement in the tie beams as directed by the Engineer.
F. Control Joints: Install control joints in masonry walls where shown or in accordance
with
sub-clause
G. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of sealant.
H. Control Joint Spacing: If control joint locations are not shown, place joints vertically,
spaced at each structural column or joint between bays of the building but in no case
spaced more than 9 m o.c. Also, place vertical joints at points of natural weakness in
the
masonry work, including the following locations:
1. Above and below major openings, at one jamb if opening is less than 1.0 m
wide
and at both jambs if opening is over1.0 m wide.
2. At vertical chases, recesses and other points of reduction in wall thickness.
3. At locations where masonry wall height changes by more than 20%.
4. Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.
5. Where end of masonry wall butts against supporting structure.
8.7.5 Laying Masonry Walls and Partition
General: In addition to requirements hereinbefore specified the following shall
apply to the installation of exterior masonry walls:
1. Space horizontal joint reinforcing 400 mm o.c. vertically in exterior
walls, unless otherwise shown.
2. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where
shown to be built into masonry work.
3. Provide flashing in masonry work as shown and extend details to cor-
ners and intersections to provide complete waterproofing.
4. Provide weep holes in the exterior skin of masonry work, located imme-
diately above flashing, shelf angles, lintels and other structural ele-
ments supporting the masonry. Space weeps 600mm centers unless
otherwise shown. Place a length of 8mm cotton sash cord in each weep
as the work progresses, and withdraw cord to clear the hole after the
work has been completed.
5. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings in cavity wall construction. Strike
mortar joints flush as the work progresses.

8.7.6 Field Quality Control

1.Check completed walls that are to receive covering to ascertain units are accurately
placed and not damaged and that masonry joints are full and accurately finished.
2. Repair or replace defects prior to application of covering.
8.7.7 Repair, Pointing and Cleaning
A.Replace blocks which are chipped, broken, stained or do not match adjoining units
as
intended, or are damaged otherwise, provide new blocks promptly to match ad-
joining blocks, pointing up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of re-
placement.
B.Where exposed masonry wall is to receive paint finish, the joints shall be neatly
pointed horizontally and vertically to show lines not exceeding 2 mm in width
and depth. A mockup is to be prepared for approval.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

69
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 C.Cleaning: During the completion of masonry installation and the tooling of joints,
enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill them with mortar. Point up all
joints at corners, openings, and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat ap-
pearance, properly prepared for the application of sealant compounds and
other work to follow. Clean the exposed masonry surfaces as follows:
1. All exposed work shall be cleaned without the use of acid. Cleaning
shall not be done until mortar is thoroughly set and hard.
2. Before wetting wall, remove large particles of mortar by means of wood
scraper, or, if necessary, by means of chisel or wire brush.
3. Pre-soak the wall, saturating the masonry with clean water, and flush
off all loose mortar and dirt.
4. Using a stiff fiber brush only, scrub down the wall with a solution of
0.25 liter household detergent and 0.25 liter of trisodium phosphate
dissolved in 4 liters of clean water.
5. Thoroughly wash off all cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using
clean pressurized water.
6. If after this cleaning procedure is completed, the wall or portion of the
wall is not clean, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Contractor shall
clean with an acid solution by means and methods acceptable to the
Engineer. If cleaned with an acid solution, all sashes, metal lintels (if
any) and other material shall be thoroughly protected.
7. Particular care shall be taken to prevent smearing mortar on surfaces
of concrete masonry units. If mortar smearing occurs, it shall be re-
moved while soft, when possible; if dry and hard, it shall be removed by
rubbing with a small piece of concrete masonry. All mortar smears,
drippings, etc., on exposed faces of concrete masonry units shall be re-
moved.
8.8 TOLERANCES
a. The position on plan shall be within 15 mm of the specified position.
b. The length shall be within 15 mm of the specified length.
c. The height shall be within 10 mm of the specified height.
d. The level of bed joints shall be within 10 mm of the specified level in any 5 m length.
e. The brickwork and blockwork shall be straight to within 15 mm in any 5 m length.
f. The brickwork and blockwork shall be vertical to within 15 mm in any 3 m height.
8.9 Measurement Method:
measurement shall be measured by accurate field measurement with deduct all voids or open-
ing as a net area without any exceptions.

9. Plastering
9.1 General:
Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
9.2 References:

BS CP 211 Code of practice for internal plastering

BS 1449: Part 2 Specification for stainless and heat-resisting steel plate
BS 4887 Mortar Admixtures, specification for air-entraining (Plasticizing) Admixture.
BS 1369 Steel lathing for internal plastering and external specification for expanded
metal and ribbed lathing
UL (FRD) Fire Resistance Directory, Underwriters Lab. Inc.
FBC Florida Building Coder
ASTM C 91 Masonry Cement
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

70
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ASTM C 631. Standard Specification for bonding Compounds.
ASTM C 841 Standard specification for installation of interior Lathing and furring
ASTM C 847 Standard Metal Lath.
ASTM C 897 Aggregates for Job Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plaster
ASTM C 926 Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster
ASTM C 91 Masonry Cement
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
ASTM C 206 Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.
ASTM C 1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and furring to Receive Interior
and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire tests of building Construction and Materials.
ASTM E494 Standard specification for chemical Admixture for concrete
ACI 524 Guide to Portland cement Plastering.

9.3 Submittals
A. Provide product data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitation of product
specified.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. The contractor should make an approved sample before starting the work.
D. Sample Panel:
1. Construct 1000 mm wide x 1000 mm high sample panel with finished surface, us-
ing
materials and methods specified herein, for review by the Engineer.
2. Accepted surface finish of sample establishes minimum standard of quality and
workmanship of cement plaster work on job.
9.4 Quality Assurance
A. Re-rolled framing and framing members containing factory welds will not be allowed.
B. Perform work in accordance with GA-600 and ASTM C1063.
C. Cement Plaster: Perform work in accordance with ASTM C926.
D. The Contractor shall make sample panels at the site at least 300cm x 300cm of plaster
work:
1. The Contractor shall take the approval of the Engineer before start plastering.
2. The accepted panels will be a basis of all work
E. Provide Engineer with a letter certifying that all materials and mixes conform to Project
Specifications.
9.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages or containers, identified
with manufacturer's label intact and legible. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to
assure continuity of work. Select and utilize handling equipment so as to avoid damage
to materials handled and damage to other construction.
B. Keep all materials dry stored above ground, under cover, protect from weather, direct
sun light, surface contamination, aging, corrosion and damage from construction traffic
and other causes.
C. The metal lathing does not store any material directly exposed to standing water or on
grade. All material should be supported so that materials are not in direct contract with
the ground.
D. Provide adequate support for the metal lathing to prevent damage of the material prior
to installation.
E. Remove wet or deteriorated materials from the Site.
9.6 Project Condition
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application
standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions
before, during, and after plaster application.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

71
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 B.
Cold Weather Requirements: Do not apply cement plaster when ambient temperature
is expected to be less than (4°C).
C. Hot Weather Conditions:
1. Use damp loose sand.
2. Use cool water for mix water.
3. Pre-dampen masonry walls prior to the application of the scratch coat.
4. Prevent the plaster from drying out by covering with a plastic sheet, or moist
cure
at least twice daily for the 2 to 3 days.
5. Do not allow fresh plaster to be subject to hot, dry winds.
D. Ventilation: Provide ventilation for drying of installed cement plaster.
E. Protection:
1. Protect plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry
weather.
2. Protect finished surfaces installed prior plastering by covering with suitable
drop
Cloths.
9.7 Products
9.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
No specified manufacturers for this tender, However Products and materials
provided by the contractor shall be comply with the requirements of contract
documents and subject to the Employer and Engineer approval and the Engineer
and the Employer have the right to reject any submittal without any liability towards
the contract.
9.7.2 Materials
A. Plaster base Coat Materials:
1. Cement ASTM C150, Type I Portland cement.
2. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
3. Sand: To BS 1200, graded 3 mm down, washed free of chlorides and sul-
phides, sampled and tested to BS 812 and ASTM C 897
4. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897
5. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic material
that may affect plaster.
6. Bonding Agent: ASTM C631; type recommended for bonding plaster to
concrete and concrete masonry surfaces.
7. Admixtures and plasticizers to be approved by the Engineer and com-
plying with BS 887 or ASTM C 494.
B. Internal plastering: Applies generally to all block work and institute concrete.
Three coats of cement and sand (1:6) plastering for internal walls, ceiling, etc.,
smooth finish as shown on the drawings.
C. For external walls, three coats cement and sand (1:4) plastering, with water-
proof
additive, including groove in external plaster as per drawings. the color and sur-
face
finish as determined by the Engineer.
D. Thermal plaster as per drawings: Advanced modified cementitious thermal insu-
lating
plaster with the following minimum requirements.
9.7.3 Accessories
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C847, BS 1369 and ASTM C 841 for
material, type, configuration and other characteristics indicated below:
1. self-furring mesh stamped sheet; 16.5kg/m2 .
2. Corner Mesh; Formed sheet steel; minimum 0.5mm thick; ex-
panded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plas-
ter; minimum 100mm size.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
72
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3. Strip Mesh; Expanded metal lath, minimum 0.5mm thick;
100mm x 600mm long.
4. Fabricate expandable-metal lath from galvanized steel struc-
tural-quality, zinc coated steel sheets.
5. Diamond-Mesh Lath Self-furring.
6. Galvanized angle bead, flange bead, corner bend and other ac-
cessories complying with ASTM C847 and ASTM C1063.
7. Expansion Joints: Back to back plaster stops of longest possible
lengths.
8. Anchorages: Nails, staples, or other metal supports, of type and
size to suit application and to rigidly secure metal accessories in
place.
9.8 Executions
9.8.1 Examination
A. Verify that substrates to receive plaster conform to the Requirement of ASTM
C926.
B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this
Section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry sur-
face.
C. Concrete: Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready
to
receive work of this Section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form re-
lease
agents exist on concrete surface that are detrimental to plaster.
9.8.2 Preparation
A. Prior to application ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to
receive cement plaster have been tested and approved.
B. Clean concrete and concrete block surfaces of dust, laitance, efflorescence, loose
particles, grease or other foreign matter. Thoroughly wet surfaces before using
acid
solutions, solvents or detergents to perform cleaning. Thoroughly wash surfaces
with clean water immediately following their use. Ensure mortar joints are flush.
C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces so as to allow adequate adhesion. Use
method
acceptable to the Engineer.
D. Apply a bonding agent on concrete and concrete block surfaces which are to re-
ceive
cement plaster. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, en-
suring complete coverage.
E. Ensure metal lath has been properly installed and rigidly secured.
F. Wet Concrete and Concrete block surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
G. Place metal accessories true to lines and levels.
H.
9.8.3 Plaster Application, General
A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound
or
agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards
for
conditioning of monolithic surfaces.
B. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1mm in 3m from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3m straightedge placed at any location or di-
rection on surface.
C. Grout hollow metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in gypsum plas-
tered

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

73
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 areas, with base coat plaster material, and odor to lathing as shown on drawings
or as indicated. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire-resis-
tance rating, grout at least 150mm at each jamb anchor clip.
D. At all internal corners between wall/wall and wall/ceiling and between all con-
crete,
element and block works joints, apply metal lath to surface with appropriate fas-
teners.
E. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work
so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other.
F. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not termi-
nated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets
and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal.
G. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by
referenced standards.
H. Concealed Plaster: Where plaster application will be concealed by wood panel-
ing,
above suspended ceilings and similar locations, finish coat may be omitted;
where
concealed behind cabinets and similar furnishings and equipment, apply finish
coat;
where used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes. Omis-
sion of
finish coat is at the Engineer's discretion.
9.8.4 Installation of Plastering Accessories
A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for
provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter accessories
at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely
to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering.
B. Metal lathing:
a. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.
b. Lap ends minimum 25mm. Secure end laps with tie wire where they oc-
cur between supports. C. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum
38mm.
c. Attach metal lath to concrete and concrete masonry using wirehair
pins. Ensure that anchors are securely attached to backup surface and
spaced at maximum 600mm o. c.
d. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner, mash, except where
the metal lath returns 76mm from corner to form the angle reinforce-
ment; fasten at perimeter edges only.
e. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of
latch only.
f. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in
place.
g. Place 100mm wide strips of metal latch centered over junctions of dis-
similar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place.
h. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door and
glazed frames to 150mm above ceiling line.
i. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends.
Secure rigidly in place.
j. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure
rigidly in place.
C. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster:
1 Corner Bead: Install at all external corners.
2 Casing Beads: Install at termination of plaster work unless otherwise in-
dicated.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

74
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations complying with the fol-
lowing criteria and approved by Engineer:
a Where an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of con-
struction directly behind plaster membrane.
b Internal every 6-9m at intersections of natural breaks, above
door jamb frames and at joints in other materials.
c External at 3.5m maximum at natural architectural breaks
above door jamb frames and at joints in other materials.
d Where area within Portland cement panels exceed 10m2.
e Where Portland cement plaster panels sizes or dimensions
change. Extend joints full width or height of plaster mem-
brane.
9.8.5 Portland Cement Plaster Application
A. Portland cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply Portland cement plaster
materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C926.
B. Number of Coats: Apply Portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Use two-coat work over the following plaster bases:
b Concrete unit masonry.
c Concrete cast-in-place or precast when surface complies with
ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded direct to solid base.
a This coat shall be scarred to form key and shall be allowed to
set for three days, during which period it shall be cured and
kept constantly wet.
2. Finish Coat: Floated finish unless otherwise indicated.
a This coat Shall not be applied until the rendering or base coat
has seasoned for 7 days; just before the application of the fin-
ish coat, the rendering or base coat shall be wetted evenly
with a fog spray.
b The finish coat shall be kept moist with a fog spray for at least
2 days, and thereafter shall be protected against rapid drying
until properly and thoroughly cured.
C. Water Curing
1. Follow procedures recommended by Portland Cement Association.
2. Cure minimum of 72 hours after all coats have set.
3. Prevent premature dry-out.
9.8.6 Plaster Repairs
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and
check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs and similar defects and where
bond to substrate has failed.
9.8.7 Cutting and Patching
A. Cut, patch, point-up and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work
and
to restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate
blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence,
sweat-outs and similar defects, and where bond to the substrate has failed.
B. Sand smooth troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arises

9.8.8 Cleaning and Protection

C. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering
of
plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows,
and other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls and other

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

75
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the
plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials,
containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.
D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to In-
staller,
which ensures plaster work is without damage or deterioration at time of sub-
stantial
completion.
9.9 TOLERANCES
There shall be no abrupt irregularities in the surface of plasterwork and other
finishes and there shall be no gradual irregularities exceeding 5 mm in a 2 m
length
9.10 Measurement Method:
measurement shall be measured by accurate field measurement with deduct all voids or open-
ing as a net area without any exceptions.

10. Painting
10.1 General:
Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.
Use products specified in this section to finish all surfaces exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated, including but not limited to the following:
a. interior wall and ceiling surfaces.
b. Opening frames and trim.
c. Exterior plaster and stucco.
d. Exterior concrete and concrete masonry.
e. Exterior metal items.
f. Finish aluminum and stainless steel only if specifically indicated to receive
field finish.
10.2 References:
American National Standard Institute (ANSI).
ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
ANSI Z535-1 Safety Color Code.
American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
ASTM D16 Standard Teminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
ASTM D5138-99 Specification for Liquid Crystal Polymers.
ASTM D4236-94R05 Practice for Labeling Art Materials for Chronic Health Hazards.
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA)
PDCA P1-92 Touch Up Painting And Damage Repair Financial Responsibility.
PDCA P5-95 Benchmark Sample Procedure For Paint And Other Decorative Coating Systems.
Steel structure painting council (SSPC).
SSPC-SP7 SSPC-SP7, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
SSPC SP.10 SSPC SP.10, Near white blast cleaning.
Steel structure painting manual VOP. 1. Good painting practice 2nd .Pitsburgh PA. SSPC. 1983.
Australian Standard (AS).
AS 1428 Design for access and mobility Set
British Standard
BS 544 Specification for Linseed Oil Putty
BS 1336 Specification for Knotting

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

76
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 BS 245 Specification for Mineral solvents
BS 2521 & BS 2523 Specification For Lead-Based Priming Paints
BS 2524 Specification for undercoating and finish paints for protective
BS 3416 Specification for Bitumen-based coatings
BS 3698 Specification for Calcium plumbate priming paints

10.3 Submittals
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. Manu-
facturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
c. Installation methods.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish product specified, three (3) complete sets of
color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and finishes.
After color selection, Engineer will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each finish product specified, three (3) samples, minimum
size (150mm) square representing actual product, color, and finish, on representative
Samples of the actual substrate.
10.4 Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: company specializing in manufacture of coatings of quality
specified with minimum of 10 years experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance with three
years documented experience.
C. Field Sample: Provide a field sample for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship, showing sequence of all coats using same materials of paint to
be used.
Finish areas designated by The Engineer.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved
by The Engineer.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
E. Performance of Paints: Paints shall be fit for purpose and manufactured specifically for
the applications indicated and uses intended, taking into account the type, nature, loca-
tion, and aesthetic and utility requirements of the project.
10.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and con-
tainers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture and expiry.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a min -
imum ambient temperature of 7 deg C. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
10.6 Project Condition
A. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

77
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 B. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during applica-
tion and drying periods.
C. During application of solvent-based materials, post "NO SMOKING" signs
10.7 Products
10.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A Manufacturer with experience in similar products and approved by the Engineer.
10.7.2 Materials
A. General: Refer to the Finishing Schedule for Paint colors, Location and Manufactur-
ers
B. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that
are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under condi-
tions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on test-
ing and field experience.
C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality material with low of the var-
ious coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
D. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to desig-
nate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required
too be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fur-
nish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed al-
ternatives.
E. Repair to the Existing Paint Work including but not limited to
a. Remove all cracked, peeling and flaking paint with a scraper, wire brush,
heat gun, or chemical application (depending on the extent and severity
of the problem).
b. Treatment of cracks using special filling materials
c. Repair plaster where required to receive the new paint.
d. Any type of preparation for the existing service to receive the new paint.
10.8 Executions
10.8.1 Examination
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for paint application.
a. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
b. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces
and conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to en -
sure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible
primers.
C. Notify the Engineer about anticipated problems when using the materials and
specified over substrates primed by others.
10.8.2 Preparation
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
B. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed
using workers skilled in the trades involved.
C. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of
substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

78
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. Plaster surfaces which are to receive paint shall be given one thin coat of oil putty
and allowed to dry for at least two days. The surfaces shall then be rubbed down
with a fine glass paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when com-
pletely set shall be rubbed down again with fine glass paper before applying the
priming coat of paint.

10.8.3 Application
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use appli-
cators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied:
a. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint
schedules.
b. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
c. Provide exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exte-
rior faces.
d. Colors: to be selected by the Engineer
e. Location: as per drawings.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-
treated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after prepara-
tion and before subsequent surface deterioration:
a. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless
of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat
has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to
produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written in-
structions, sand between applications.
b. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint,
apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and ap-
pearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, comers, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to
that of flat surfaces.
c. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.
Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and
does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until
application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total
dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Prime Coats. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has
not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evi-
dence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish
coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
F. Painting on woodwork: All cracks, crevices and holes in the woodworks shall be
scrapped out, primed and made good with hard-stopping, and faced up and
rubbed down to an even and smooth finish.
The hard stopping shall be of an approved make or made up on the Site in accor -
dance with the best local custom and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All knots
shall be burnt and treated with an approved solution of methylated-spirit shellac.
All woodwork shall receive one priming coat of leadless chromates/Alkyds before
installation. After installation, it shall receive two coats of putty and two coats of
undercoat paint (with each undercoat following each putty coat in succession) and
rubbed smooth after each undercoat, and a final coat of semi-gloss or gloss finish
oil paint as required of an approved colour, conforming to B.S. 2525 and as manu-

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

79
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 factured by I.P.I. or I.P.C. or an approved equivalent. All hardwood shall be painted
with three coats of translucent paint (varnish shellac) unless otherwise specified,
which complies with the provisions of ASTM D360.
G. Painting of metalwork: All rust, scale and loose paint (if any) shall be removed from
metal surfaces prior to painting by means of metal brushes and chisel and ham-
mer.
All steel work shall have one priming coat of metallic chromate/alkyd primer 2 dry
mils, brush-or spray-applied to ASTM D-478 before installation; and three further
coats after installation of rubber-based paint of an approved colour and used in ac-
cordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. This shall be as manufactured by
DuPont, Carboline, International, Mobile, Tnemec or an approved equivalent.
H. Emulsion paint: All plastered surfaces to be painted shall be dry-brushed and
cleaned. Where surfaces show salt deposits or efflorescence, the Contractor shall
carefully neutralize them with a solution of 2 kg. of zinc sulphate crystals dissolved
in 5 litres of water. This solution shall be left to dry. Emulsion paint shall be based
on Acrylic co-polymers providing a silk-smooth finish upon drying. A fungicide ad-
ditive shall be used with the paint in accordance with the directions of the manu-
facturer, obtained from an approved manufacturer and applied in one primer coat
and three finishing coats, with putty treatment after each undercoat.
I. Textured paint: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the Engineer, exter-
nal plastered surfaces shall be decorated with textured paint of acrylic tripolymer-
elastomeric type or rubber based, to B.S. 3900, Parts F1, 2, 4 and 7. Surfaces to be
so treated shall be even, free from cracks, irregularities or any other defects, and
cleaned and left to dry. The paint shall be of an approved color and shall be
brought to Site in the manufacturer’s sealed containers and applied in two coats in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and instructions. Applica-
tion shall be by use of suitable texture-forming brush, roller or spraygun as may be
required by the nature of the work and/or specified in the Bill of Quantities. The
first coat shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours before application of the second coat.
Decorated surfaces shall be of an even colour, free from brush marks or any other
stains, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
10.8.4 Cleaning and Protection
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and
other discarded paint materials from Project site.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spat-
tered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent fin-
ished surfaces.
10.9 Measurement Method:
Measurement shall be measured by accurate field measurement with deduct all voids or open-
ing as a net area without any exceptions.

11. Insulation
11.1 General:
Membrane waterproofing associated with work in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
a. All structural elements are below grade.
b. Wet areas interior wall and ceiling surfaces.
11.2 References: this section should be comply with following
American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
ASTM D146-90 Test Method for Sampling and Testing Bitumen- Saturated Belts and Woven.
Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing.
ASTM D4258-83 Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.
ASTM D5385-93 Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes.
ASTM D3767-03 Practice for Rubber/Measurement of dimensions.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

80
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ASTM D412-98 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermpplastic Elestromers/ MTension.
ASTM D882-02 Test Methods for Tensile properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
ASTM D570-98 Test Method for Water absorption of plastics.
ASTM D903-98 Test Method for peel stripping strength of Adhesive Bonds.
ASTM E154-99 Test Methods for water vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth under Con-
crete Slabs, on walls, or as Ground Cover.
ASTM C836-89a Specification for High Solid Content, cold Liquid Elastomeric Waterproofing
Membrane.
ASTM D412-92 Test Methods for Volcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermpo-
lastic Elastomers
ASTM E96-94 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission or Materials
ASTM D1475 Test Method for density of liquid coatings, Ink and related products.
ASTM C661-83 Test Method for Identation Hardness of Elastomeric Type sealant by Means of
Dorometer.
ASTM C794 Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastrmeric Joint sealants.
ASTM D903 Test Method for peel or stripping strength of Adhesive Bands.
ASTM D1640 Test Methods for drying, curing, or film formation of Organic Coatings and
Room temperature.
ASTM D1970 Specification for self-Adhering Polymer modified Bituminnes
sheet Materials used as sleep resting underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
ASTM D5295 Guide for preparation of concrete surface for Adhered (Bonded) membrane wa-
ter proofing systems.
ASTM D 882 Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; 2001.
ASTM D 1709 Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method; 2001.
ASTM D 2582 Puncture-Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting;
2000.
ASTM D 3776 Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Woven Fabric; 1996.
ASTM D 4833 Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Prod-
ucts; 2000.
ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
ASTM E 1643 Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill
Under Concrete Slabs; 1998.
ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997.
National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) (U.S.A.) 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 3rd Edition,
NRCA 1990.
Waterproofing and Dampproofing Manual NRCA 1990.

11.3 Submittals
A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer for his approval in accordance with the require-
ments of the Contract Documents, manufacturer's specifications and installation instruc-
tions for the membrane waterproofing system and other data to show compliance with
the Contract Documents.
B. Submit three samples of cold fluid applied waterproofing. Samples shall be 300mm
square, on plywood.
11.4 Quality Assurance
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the
specified materials have been successfully utilized on work of a similar scope to that
shown and specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have been com-
pleted and in use for a minimum of ten (10) years without any evidence of failure.
D. Installer Qualification: Membrane waterproofing and cold fluid applied waterproofing
shall be executed by an approved Specialist with minimum of five (5) years’ experience in
similar Projects.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

81
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 E.
Contractor's Review: Before commencing work submit written statement signed by the
Contractor, stating that the Contract Documents for the membrane waterproofing sys-
tem have been reviewed with a qualified representative of the waterproofing materials
manufacturer and that he is in agreement that the selected materials for membrane wa-
terproofing system are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown.
F. Pre-installation Meeting: Prior to the installation of membrane waterproofing, meet at
the Project Site to review the material selections, installation procedures and coordina-
tion of the work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Contractor, the Engineer,
Manufacturer's Representatives and any other whose work requires coordination with
this work.
G. Source Limitations: Obtain fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
H. Performance of Paints: Paints shall be fit for purpose and manufactured specifically for
the applications indicated and uses intended, taking into account the type, nature, loca-
tion, and aesthetic and utility requirements of the project.
11.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers identified with name brand,
type, grade, class and all other qualifying information.
B. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating the name, type
and grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying each load (or furnish
manufacturer's blanket certificate) for each bulk product used in the Work.
C. Store materials in a dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of for-
eign matter. Conspicuously mark "Rejected" on materials which have once been wet or
damaged and remove from the job site.
11.6 Project Condition
A. Do not apply membrane waterproofing during inclement weather or when air tempera-
ture is outside the range recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written notorized warranty executed by the Contrac-
tor against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification of any
leak within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements including
the removal and replacement of work superimposed over the membrane waterproofing,
and to the complete works in accordance with Contract Documents and approval of the
Engineer. In addition, The Warranty period for Membrane Waterproofing shall be ten
(10) years after the end of defects liability period.
C. Do not apply waterproofing membrane during inclement weather or when air tempera-
ture is below 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).
D. Do not apply waterproofing membrane to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or unsuitable deck
surfaces. Concrete surfaces must be cured for 28 days or as indicated in the Specifica-
tions.
E. Provide positive ventilation when waterproofing is applied in enclosed areas, to remove
toxic fumes.

11.7 Products
11.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
No specified manufacturers for this tender, However Products and materials provided by
the contractor shall comply with the requirements of contract documents and subject to
the Employer and Engineer approval and the Engineer and the Employer have the right to
reject any submittal without any liability towards the contract.
11.7.2 Materials
A. Vapor barrier (separation layer polyethylene sheets) 250 microns (1000 gauge),
including over lapping at joints, taping of joints,
 Mastic Tape: ECC STRIP Tape.
 Description: Black, double-sided, asphaltic, pressure-sensitive, mastic
tape.
 Width: 50 mm

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

82
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
  Thickness: 1.0 mm
 Liquid Mastic Sealant: ECC Mastic Liquid Patch.
 D. Pipe Boots: ECC Pipe SEALS
B. Two perpendicular coats cold apply bituminous membrane.
Applied Fluid Waterproofing
Description: Applied Fluid waterproofing as approved by the Engineer.
Location: Below slabs, SOG and structural walls and where needed complete as per
drawings.
Technical Data:
 Layer thickness = min 2mm nominal.
 Mixed density: Min. 1.05 kg/liter to DIN EN ISO 2811-1.
 Elongation at break: Minimum ~ 350% to DIN 53 504.
 Solid content: Minimum >99%.
 Tensile Strength = min 1.5 MPa.
 Performance requirements to ASTM C836 = meets requirement.
C. Torch applied waterproofing membrane.
4mm thick torch applied SBS or APP
Modified bituminous polymer water- proofing membrane , chipped with gravel in-
cluding bitumen primer, all necessary preparation and fixing works, overlapping,
complete as per manufacture’s instruction data and engineer’s approval :
 Number of layer : one
 Sheet thickness (mm): 4
 Side lap width (mm): 150
 End lap width (mm): 150
 Method of lying: Hot Torch Applied
 Tear resistant : minimum 350-600N

11.8 Executions
11.8.1 Examination
Examine all surfaces to which the membrane waterproofing is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
approved by the Engineer's Representative.
11.8.2 Preparation
A. Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material which would impair the
Work.
B. Do not proceed with membrane waterproofing until all drains, piping, conduit,
vents, ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed
and protected.
C. Treat external and internal corners of substrate as shown and in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. For the fluid Waterproofing
a. Apply surface conditioner at a rate not exceeding 1 liter per 10 square
meters nor less than 1 liter per 5 square meters depending on con-
crete surface. Protect surface conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
b. Apply 300 mm wide strip of joint cover sheet over cracks, non-working
joints, and expansion joints, over 1.6 mm but not exceeding 12.7 mm
in width.
c. At expansion joints from 12.7 mm to 25 mm in width, loop cover sheet
down into joint between 1-1/4 and 1-3/4 inch 31.4 and 44.1 mm.
Sheet is to extend at least 6 inches 152 mm on either side of the ex-
pansion joint.
d. Center cover sheet over crack or joints. Roll sheet into 3.2 mm coating
of waterproofing membrane. Apply second coat over sheet extending
minimum of 152mm, beyond sheet edges.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

83
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 e. Procedure stated above shall also apply to expansion joints between
horizontal and vertical surfaces.

11.8.3 Installation
A. Install vapor retarders in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
ASTM E 1643 for concrete slabs.
B. Install vapor retarders in largest practical widths. Membrane to be unrolled
with the longest dimension parallel to the direction of the pour.
C. Ensure surface beneath vapor retarders is smooth with no sharp projections.
D. Join sections of vapor retarders and seal penetrations in vapor retarders with
mastic tape with a minimum 6-inch overlap. Ensure vapor retarders surfaces to
receive mastic tape are clean and dry.
E. Immediately repair holes in vapor retarders with liquid mastic or vapor barrier
section with mastic tape.
F. Install membrane and water proofing in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions except as hereinafter specified for all installation proce-
dure.
G. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Follow the recommended technique of the membrane manufacturer for clean-
ing, seam, lap and splice areas, for the method and sequence of forming field
joints in the membrane.
I. Flash all pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other projections passing through mem-
brane waterproofing and provide tight construction throughout. Use prefabri-
cated boots or field-fabricated boots, fitted coverings, and other accessories as
required.
J. Provide water cut-off's in accordance with the approved membrane manufac-
turer's recommendations.
K. Install protection board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
L. Upon completion of any portion of waterproofing, immediately cover that por-
tion with protective covering.
M. For the fluid Waterproofing
a. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses pro-
vide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative at the
job site as often as deemed necessary by the manufacturer to advise
on all phases of this work.
b. Install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
c. Install cant strips where shown or recommended by the waterproofing
materials manufacturer.
d. Allow waterproofing to cure properly. During this period block off
traffic and protect waterproofing from physical damage.
11.8.4 Application
A. All prepared surfaces shall when dry, be painted with a coat of primer at a rate
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. All blinding surfaces must be
finished fair-faced or trowel smooth to receive the waterproofing membrane.
B. Apply the waterproof membrane surface against prepared surfaces, in accor-
dance with manufacturers recommendations, ensuring that air is excluded from
under membrane.
C. Adjacent rolls of waterproof membrane should be provided with a minimum
150 mm lap and complete adhesion must be achieved between both layers to
ensure complete waterproofing.
D. All external and internal angles and corners shall be reinforced with an extra
strip of waterproof membrane, minimum 300 mm wide.
E. All internal corners should be provided with a 50 mm X 50 mm minimum fillet.
F. All end of membrane shall be 20mm x 20mm rebate in to concrete.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

84
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 G. Under all the new walls which is under ground with at least 100 mm covering
the ground beam or the masonry wall.
H. Where waterproof membrane is to be terminated above ground level (150mm
from G.L. or as instructed by the Engineer a chase should be provided of mini-
mum dimension 25 mm x 25 mm. The waterproof membrane should be dressed
into the chase and immediately sealed as per the approved Shop Drawings.
I. Pipes and other projections through waterproof membrane should be properly
treated with reinforcing strips, collars etc. as per manufacturer's recommenda-
tions to ensure complete waterproofing.
J. Where waterproof membrane is expected to be left exposed for any length of
time the top edge should be batten-fixed to secure edge. The perimeter should
be left with an extended edge for later continuity and the free edge shall be ad-
equately protected while exposed. The free edge of the membrane should be
carefully cleaned before further laying is commenced.
K. Before covering, inspect to ensure no damage. Any damaged area should be
cleaned and patched in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to
ensure complete waterproofing.
L. On horizontal and vertical applications where steel reinforcement is to be fixed
prior to concreting the waterproof membrane should be protected with protec-
tion board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations (4mm thick for
horizontal surfaces, 4mm thick for vertical surfaces).
M. The area of waterproof membrane laid in a working day should not exceed that
which can be protected in the same working day, in order to ensure that mem-
brane is not subjected to site traffic or damage.
N. Materials having limited shelf life are to be supplied with labels indicating batch
number and dates of manufacture and expiry. Materials not properly stored or
which have exceeded their expiry date will not be permitted to be used in the
work and are to be removed from the site.
O. Submit ten years guarantee covering materials and workmanship of water-
proofing system. To guarantee should be substituted with a certified copy of
the material guarantee provided by the manufacturer.
P. For the fluid Waterproofing
a. Apply coating material at dry film thickness of 60 mils. Extend coating
overall detail coating and as per manufacturer recommendations.
b. Temperature of hot poured waterproof membrane is to be within min-
imum and maximum range recommended by membrane product man-
ufacturer.
c. Apply and spread waterproofing to a minimum 3.2 mm thickness and
averaging 4.8 mm thickness.
d. Continue membrane up vertical surfaces to a minimum of 152 mm un-
less otherwise noted.
e. Seal items projecting through membrane.
f. Install membrane flashings and seal into membrane.
g. Reinforce membrane over joints, whether they be static or moving.
h. Immediately after cooling, dust membrane with Portland Cement at
rate of approximately 65 kilograms per 10 square meters.
11.8.5 Protection and cleaning
A. Protect membrane waterproofing from damage during construction period so
that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at time of completion
or covering with other materials.
B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping
of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during membrane water-
proofing operations.
C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains.
D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery,
storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

85
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials
specified or required under this Section.
E. Protect clean and leave waterproofing to receive subsequent construction
.
11.9 Field Quality Control :
Testing: Fill water in an area selected by the Engineer to a minimum depth of 50mm. Plug
any drains in the area and maintain water level for a period of 48 hours.

12. Tiles Work

12.1 General:
This section is for ceramic tiles for the floor and wall .
12.2 References: This section should be comply with following:
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI A108-1, A-2099 Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet Set Method with Port-
land cement Mortar.
ANSI A108-1, B-2099 Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mor-
tar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A108-1, 1C-2099 Specifications for Contractors Option. Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set
Method with Portland Cement Mortar-or-Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement
Mortar.
ANSI A108-4, 2099 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives or Water-Clean-
able Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
ANSI A108-5 , 2099 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A108-6, 2099 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with chemicalResistant, Water-Clean-
able Tile-Setting and-Grouting Epoxy.
ANSI A108-8, 2099 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with ChemicalResistant Furan Mortar
and Grout.
ANSI A108-9, 2099 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/
Grout.
ANSI A108-10, 2099 Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tile work.
ANSI A118-1, 2099 Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A118-3, 2099 Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Wa-
ter-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
ANSI A118-4, 2099 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A118-5, 2099 Chemical-Resistant. Furan Mortar and Grout.
ANSI A118-6, 2099 Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts.
ANSI A118-7, 2099 Polymer Modified Cement Grouts.
ANSI A118-8, 2099 Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
ANSI A118-9, 2099 Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.
ANSI A118-10. 2099 Load bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-set Ceramic Tile and Di-
mensional Stone Insulation.
ANSI A118-11, 2099 Exterior Grade Plywood (EGP) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A1361-1, 2099 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
ANSI A137-1, 2088 Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
ASTM C171: 97 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C373: 88 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density,
ASTM C501: 84 Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile
by the Taber Abraser

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

86
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ASTM C920: 01 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C1027: 99 Standard Test Method for Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of Glazed
Ceramic Tile
ASTM C1028: 96 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ce-
ramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the
Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method
ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C2-7 Standard Specification of Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C241 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of stone Subjected to Foot Traffic.
ASTM C503 Specification for Marble Building Stone (Exterior).
ASTM C615 Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
ASTM C629 Specification for State Dimension Stone.
ASTM C847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
ASTM C1008 Test method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction or Ceramic Tile
and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull meter Method.
ASTM D4397 Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricul-
tural Applications.
German Standards
DIN 18156-2: 78 Materials for ceramic linings by thin mortar bed technique; hydraulic mortar
DIN 18156-3: 80 Material for ceramic linings by thin mortar bed technique; dispersion adhesive
DIN 18156-4: 84 Materials used for the application of ceramic tiling by the thin bed method;
epoxy resin adhesive
Cods
BS 5385-1: 95 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of Internal Ceramic Wall Tiling
and Mosaics
BS 5385-2: 91 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of External Ceramic Wall Tiling
and Mosaics
BS 4131: 73 Terrazzo tiles
BS 8204-4: 93 Insitu Flooring / Code of Practice for terrazzo wearing surfaces
The National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (NTMA)
DIN 51130 and 51097 ramp test (ceramic slip resistance).
BS 6431-19 Ceramic floor and wall tiles
BS 5385-3: 89 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of Ceramic Floor Tiles
BS 5385-4: 92 Code of Practice for Tiling and Mosaics in Specific Conditions
BS 5385-5: 94 Code of Practice for the design and installation of terrazzo tile and slab, natural
stone and composition block floorings BS 8000-11: 89 Code of Practice
for wall and floor tiling
The National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (NTMA)
Saudi Arabian Standards
TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation by tile Council of America, current edition.
12.3 Submittals
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
B. Samples of tile, grout, edging and finishing profiles and field sample not less than 2m x
2m.
C. Shop drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color, perimeter conditions and junctions
as well as locate and detail expansion and control joints. Take width of edge tiles not less
than half width of tile.
D. Material test reports: For each tile-setting and grouting product.
E. Maintenance data including stain removal methods.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

87
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
12.4 Quality Assurance
A. Installer Qualifications: Company as skilled tilers specializing in performing the work of
this section with minimum five years experience to be approved by The Engineer. B. Sin -
gle source responsibility.
a. Obtain each type and color tile material required from single source.
b. Obtain setting and grouting materials from one manufacturer to ensure compati-
bility and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
c. Obtain prefabricated edge protection, transition, and movement profiles from
one manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
B. Certifications
a. Submit "Master Grade Certificate" for each type of ceramic, porcelain and
pavers file in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A137-1.
b. Submit manufacturer's certifications that mortars, adhesives, and grouts are
suitable for intended use.
12.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified with name,
brand, type, and grade.
B. Protect materials from contaminations, dampness, freezing, or overheating in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Broken, cracked, chipped, stained, or damaged tile will be rejected, whether built-in or
not.
D. Protect mortar and grout materials against moisture, soiling or staining.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
F. Store in location as directed by the owner.
G. Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended stain removal methods, and
polishes and wax recommended.
H. Sensitive material (e.g. adhesive, grout, sealant etc.) shall be labelled with date of manu-
facture, service life, instructions for proper storage and use, and any necessary precau-
tion related to toxicity and flammability.

12.6 Products
12.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
Terrazzo and Ceramic Tiles: Manufacturer with experience in the specified product
and approved by the Engineer.
.
12.6.2 Materials
A. Terrazzo
1. Precast terrazzo units ( sizes: 250 x 250 mm and 300 x 300 mm) shall
be formed with a (1:2.5) mix of white or tinted Portland cement and
granular local marble chippings for the topping (wearing layer) set on
cement and sand backing (1:5) mix and shall be obtained from an ap-
proved manufacturer. All in accordance with JSS.
2. The units shall be case in heavy steel moulds under. pressure to the
proportions and sieve sizes approved by the Engineer. The thickness
of the wearing layer shall not be less than 10 mm and the pattern and
dimensions shall be as shown on the drawings and/or stated in the
Bill of Quantities.
3. Grinding shall be done wet by means of a No. 80 Carborundum stone.
Filling shall be carried out with a neat cement grout of the same
colour as the facing mix and this shall be worked into the surface with
a wooden scraper. to fill all voids and air holes. Surplus grout shall be
removed with a dry cloth.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

88
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 4.
Terrazzo units shall be cured by totally immersing them after. the ini-
tial set has taken place in a tank of clean water for at least 24 hours.
B. Ceramic Tiles and Skirting
1. Nonslip ceramic floor tiles and skirting (Sizes as shown on drawings
and schedule of finishes) shall be first quality vitreous clay, with keyed
back to comply with BS 1286 Type B and shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer.
2. Tiles shall be first grade top quality imported
C. Repair to the Existing Tile: The Work includes:
 Replace broken tiles (size and shape to match the existing)
 Add missing tiles (size and shape to match the existing)
 Remove weak grout!
 Add grout for the removed and missing grout.
 Clean and polishing
 Any type of fixation
 Fixation for the not installed properly and weak tile.
D. Tile Bedding Material:
 Cement: sand-backing mortar shall be ordinary Portland cement and
shall comply with ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
 Sand: sand backing mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from nat-
ural sources in accordance with BS 1199 or an equivalent standard.
 Water : Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will
not be allowed for mixing water. All containers used for storing water
shall be clean and sun protected.
 Adhesive: The mixing of components supplied before use shall be car-
ried out in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's instruction.
The tile adhesive shall be tested against the panel wall partition se-
lected for the Contract complete with moisture sealer. Acceptance
standard shall be minimum 0.3 N/mm
 Cement-based Adhesive: Cement-based adhesive shall comply with
one of the following standards: BS 5980 type 1 or 3. - DIN 18156-Part
2.
 Epoxy Adhesive: Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial
setting and shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 5.
DIN 18156-Part 4.

E. Admixtures:
 Admixtures to cement: sand Mortar : Admixtures to cement: sand
mortar may be air entraining-, water reducing-, plasticizing-, retarding
agents and shall comply with BS 5075 or an equivalent standard.
 Admixtures to Adhesives: Admixtures to adhesives shall be used in ac-
cordance with manufacturer's instructions. They shall not be added to
any adhesive unless approved by the manufacturer of the adhesive.
 Bonding Agents: Bonding agents shall comply with manufacturer's in-
structions and shall be certified as suitable for the intended use.
 Grouts: Grout shall have low shrinkage and good adhesion and shall be
certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
 Sand: Cement Grout : The proportions of cement: sand shall be 1:1 for
joints not exceeding 3.0 mm, 1:2 for joints between 3.0 mm and 6.0
mm and 1:3 for joints wider than 6.0 mm. For joint width up to 6.0
mm, sand for grouts shall not exceed 2.36 mm. Necessary alkali-resis-
tant pigments shall be added to achieve white or colored joints as indi-
cated or, if not indicated, as approved by the Engineer.
Cement: sand-bedding mortar shall comply with BS 5385 or an equiva-
lent standard

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

89
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Cement: sand-bedding mortar shall be (1:3 to 1:4 by volume) or (1: 3.4
to 1: 4.6 by weight).
12.7 Executions
12.7.1 Examination
A. Examine Substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with in-
staller present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile:
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of oil, waxy
film and curing compounds, and within flatness tolerances required by ref-
erenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indi-
cated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work and similar items located in or behind tile has
been completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in the substrates are coordinated with tile joint
locations, if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with the
Engineer.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.
12.7.2 Preparation
A. Before tiling commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for new concrete or
masonry to dry out. If rendering is subsequently to be applied, it shall be left for
at least more than 2 weeks.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that con-
tain soap, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
C. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards.
D. For tiles exhibition color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as
those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory
blended return the tiles to the manufacturer.

12.7.3 Installation
A. The installation should be comply with BS 5385-3 or equivalent.
B. Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required, sur-
faces to receive tiling shall be centred and balanced.
C. Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions.
D. Tiles shall be closely fit to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetra-
tions so that plates, collars or covers overlap tile.
E. Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts shall
be positioned on the outer edges of surfaces and no cuts shall be smaller than
half tile size.
F. Wall tiles shall be laid in full courses to the nearest obtainable dimension unless
otherwise indicated.
G. To ensure that courses of tiles are exactly horizontal, a level line shall be estab-
lished to position the starting course.
H. All joints shall be straight and of even width.
I. All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface will be
true, when checked with a (2.0 m) straightedge, any gap found does not exceed
3 mm and the straightedge will not be obstructed by tiles. The max. Deviation

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

90
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 between tiles surfaces on any side of a joint shall not exceed 1 mm for joints
less than 6 mm wide and 2.0 mm for joints 6 mm or more wide.
J. Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be continuous
with structural movement joints.
K. Additional movement joints (control-, contraction-, and isolating joints) shall be
positioned where tile work abuts restraining surfaces such as walls, columns,
door frames, windows, pipes etc., at internal vertical corners, at changes of
alignment (wall/floor), where tiling is continuous across junctions of different
backgrounds and in large tiled areas at 3.0 m to 4.5 m centres (wall tiling) and
where areas are to be bay jointed (floor tiling).
L. Such movement joints shall be at least 5 mm wide. The minimum depth of
sealant shall be 6 mm unless tiles thinner than 6 mm are being used.
M. Before sealant is applied, edges of tiles shall be primed when recommended by
the sealant manufacturer.
N. If a cement: sand mortar backing is applied, movement joints shall be filled up
with a back-up material before being sealed. If thin adhesive bedding is applied
and where depth of joints is insufficient to accommodate a compressible back-
up material, a selfadhesive tape shall be used as bondbreaker.
O. No greater area of mortar or adhesive shall be applied than can be worked be-
fore setting.
P. Dry background surfaces shall be wetted prior to fixing of tiles to prevent exces-
sive absorption of water from the mortar bed. The tiles shall be immersed in
water for 30 minutes and shall be allowed to drain immediately before laying.
The cement and sand bed shall be compacted and finished to the required
level. A slurry of cement and sand in the proportions 1:1 by volume shall be
mixed with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a creamy con-
sistency and shall be spread and trowelled over the bed to a nominal thickness
of 3 mm. The tiles shall be firmly bedded into the slurry to leave straight and
even joints. Tiles with minor variation in colour shall be placed at random loca-
tions.
Q. The backs of glazed wall tiles shall be coated with a mortar of cement and sand
or granite fines in the proportions 1:3 by volume. The glazed wall tiles shall be
tamped firmly into position so that the bed is uniformly spread throughout to a
minimum thickness of 3 mm and not more than 6 mm at localised areas for rec-
tification of slight variations in the trueness of the render background. The tiles
and joints shall be cleaned before the bedding hardens.
R. A minimum of 24 hours shall be allowed for evaporation of adhesive solvents
prior to grouting unless otherwise required by the manufacturer of the adhe-
sive. When grouting with cement: sand site mixed grout, joints shall be wetted
prior to grouting. When using a proprietary grout, joints shall only be wetted
when recommended by the grout manufacturer.

12.7.4 TOLERANCES
There shall be no abrupt irregularities in the surface of plasterwork and other
finishes and there shall be no gradual irregularities exceeding 5 mm in a 2 m
length.
12.7.5 Protection and cleaning
A. On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces in ac-
cordance with manufacturer's written instructions so they are free of foreign
materials.
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
C. After lying floor tiles, no traffic shall be allowed on the floor for the first 7 days
and after that only light traffic as approved by the Engineer is allowed for the
next 10 days.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

91
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner
from tile surfaces.
12.8 Measurement Method:
Measurement shall be measured by accurate field measurement with deduct all voids or open-
ing as a net area without any exceptions.

13. Aluminum Doors and Windows Work

13.1 General:
This section is for Aluminum framed and Hardware for the door and windows.
13.2 References: This section should be comply with following:
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
CW-10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to
Site.
501.2 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Store-
fronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.
503 Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls and
Sloped Glazing Systems.
611 Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
1503 Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Win-
dows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.
2604 Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Perfor-
mance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
2605 Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Per-
forming Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
800 Voluntary Specification sand Test Methods for Sealants.
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA)
A156.1 Butts and Hinges.
A156.3 Exit Devices. 3. A156.4 - Door Controls - Closers.
A156.26 Continuous Hinges. D.
ANSI/BHMA A 156.4: 92 Door Controls - Closers
ANSI/BHMA A 156.5: 92 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
ANSI A 156.13: 94 Locks and Latches, Mortise
ANSI A 156.17: 99 Hinges and Pivots, Self-Closing
American Welding Society (AWS)
D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. E. ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
A36/A36M Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
C509 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Material.
C794 Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C864 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, and Spacers.
C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT, Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
C1115 Standard Specification for Dense
C1184 Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants.
C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

92
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 C1184 Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants.
C1281 Standard Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications.
E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
E774 Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units
E1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
E2189 Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating Glass
Units.
E2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
F1233 Standard Specification for Security Glazing Materials and Systems.
B85 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Casting.
B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
E283 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Cur-
tain Walls, and Doors.
E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
E547 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Cyclical Static Air Pressure Differential.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 305 - Safety Panic Hardware.
Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC)16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materi-
als. F. Glass Association of North America (GANA):
1. Engineering Standards Manual
2. Glazing Manual.
3. Sealant Manual.
British Standards
BS 5252: 76 Framework for color co-ordination for building purposes
BS 6496: 84 (91) Powder organic coatings to aluminum
BS 6497: 84 (91) Powder organic coatings to galvanized Steel
BS 952 Glass for glazing
BS 952 - 1: 95 Classification (R)
BS 5051: 88(94) Specification for glazing for interior use
BS 5544: 78(94) Specification for anti-bandit glazing
BS 6262: 82 Code of Practice for glazing for buildings
BS 4873 Aluminum alloy windows and door sets
BS EN 485-1 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Sheet, strip and plate - Part 1: Technical condi-
tions for inspection and delivery
BS EN 485-2+A1 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Sheet, strip and plate - Part 2: Mechanical
properties (including amendment 1)
BS EN 485-3 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Sheet, strip and plate - Part 3: Tolerances on
dimensions and form
BS EN 485-4 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Sheet, strip and plate - Part 4: Tolerances on
shape and dimensions for cold-rolled products
BS EN 515 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Wrought products - Temper designations
BS EN 573-1 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Chemical composition and form of wrought
products - Part 1: Numerical designation system
BS EN 573-2 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Chemical composition and form of wrought
products - Part 2: Chemical symbol based designation system

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

93
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 BS EN 573-3 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Chemical composition and form of wrought
products - Part 3: Chemical composition limits
BS EN 573-5 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Chemical composition and form of wrought
products - Part 5: Codification of standardized conditions for heat treatment
BS EN 755 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles
BS EN 12020 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN AW-
6060 and EN AW-6063
German Standards
DIN 4108 - 4: 02 Thermal insulation and energy economy in buildings; hygrothermal design val-
ues, thermal insulation and protection against moisture
DIN 16935: 86 Polyisobutylene (PIB) waterproofing sheets; requirements
DIN 18203 - 2: 86 Tolerances in building; prefabricated steel components
DIN 4109: 89 Sound insulation in buildings; requirements and testing.
DIN 52210 - 3: 87 Testing of acoustics in buildings; airborne and impact sound
insulation; laboratory measurements of sound insulation of building elements
and field measurements between rooms
DIN PrEN 1096-1: 99 Glass in building – Coated glass- part 1: Definitions and Classification
VDI 2719: 87 Sound isolation of windows and their auxiliary equipment table2+3
Saudi Arabian Standards
13.3 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings - Show:
a. Joining techniques, provision for expansion and contraction, anchorage details,
and framing member profiles, elevations, and details.
b. Materials and finishes.
c. Relative layout of adjacent and supporting construction.
d. Glass, setting blocks, jamb blocking, and glazing seals.
e. Weep drainage network.
f. Joint sealants, backer rods, bond breakers, and primers.
g. Loads applied to structure: Location, direction, and magnitude.
B. Samples:
a. 300mm x 300mm glass samples showing available colors.
b. Aluminum framing system samples for each profile, showing cross section and
finish.
c. Color control samples for the final finish Maintenance data including stain re-
moval methods.
d. Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware
specified. Co-ordinate hardware with window and doorframes, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, function, and finish. Include item name, name
of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each
door and/ or window opening.

13.4 Quality Assurance and QC:

A. Aluminum Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experi-
ence in work of this Section.
B. Aluminum Fabricator and installer must provide currently dated evidence for being au-
thorized by the system provider to fabricate and install the system.
C. Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform with specifi-
cation and referenced standards prior to assembly or installation.
D. Checking suppliers’ delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification
E. Test Reports: Certified results of previous tests substantiating compliance with specified
design and performance criteria, current within past 5- years.
F. Welder Qualifications: As required by AWS.
C. Certifications

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

94
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 a.
Furnish System Provider 5 -year warranty providing coverage on system integrity
and sustainability through curtain wall system/s used. B. Furnish System
Provider Product Insurance Certificate.
b. Furnish Manufacturer and installer 5- year warranty providing coverage against
water leakage through curtain wall system and reduction of performance.
13.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Deliver windows and door cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during
transit and job storage.
B. Windows and doors at building site shall be under cover. Place units on minimum 10 cm
high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could cre-
ate a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper becomes wet during transport, remove
carton immediately. Provide minimum 5 cm spaces between stacked elements to pro-
mote air circulation.
C. Protect hardware and glass and glazing materials during delivery to comply with manu-
facturer’s directions, and as required to prevent any damage, especially to plated and
polished articles, including effects of moisture, condensation and temperature change.
D. Store hardware and glass at building site only originally packed, protect it against dust
and dirt and take care for proper ventilation to prevent condensation.
E. windows and doors shall be handled and stored in a manner which will not result in dam-
age or distortion. Opening lights shall be kept closed.
13.6 Products
13.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
Alumium sections, hardware, and glass : Manufacturer with experience in the speci-
fied product and approved by the Engineer.

13.6.2 Materials
A. Aluminum windows, doors, and Fabrication:
1. Aluminum windows and doors shall be designed and fabricated by
the
Contractor in accordance with BS 4873.
2. Sections shall be extruded aluminum alloy complying with BS EN
485-1, BS EN 485-2+A1, BS EN 485-3, BS EN 485-4, BS EN 515, BS EN
573-1, BS EN 573-2, BS EN 573-3, BS EN 573-5, BS EN 755 and BS EN
12020, British alloy designation 6063
3. Aluminum Components: Alloy and temper best suited to application.
a. Extrusions: ASTM B221.
b. Sheet: ASTM B209.
c. Castings: ASTM B85.
d. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.
4. Aluminum Components: Alloy and temper best suited to application.
5. Fabrication:
a. Fabricate with minimum clearances and shim spaces around
perimeter yet enabling installation and dynamic movement.
b. Accurately fit and secure joints and intersections. Make
joints flush, hairline, and weathertight.
c. Fabricate in largest practical units.
d. Conceal fasteners and attachments from view.
e. Reinforce framing members with internal metal (steel or Alu-
minum) when required to support imposed loads.
f. Fabricate so that components will not be excessively
strained under normal conditions of use.
g. Provide slotted holes for erection adjustment and thermal
movements.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

95
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 h. Fabricate fascias, covers, closures, flashings, capping and
trim members from same material as curtain wall and ceil-
ing.
i. Allow for dummy mullions or transoms where needed, in co-
ordination with internal walls, partitions, false ceilings and
flooring.
j. Make provision in design to drain to exterior leakage of wa-
ter occurring at joints and condensation taking place within
construction.
k. Provide gutters at horizontals at bottom of glass, weep to ex-
terior through baffled weep holes.
l. Fabricate aluminum components with integral low conduc-
tance thermal barrier located between exterior and interior
exposed components that eliminates metal-to-metal con-
tact.
m. Provide horizontal and vertical compartmentation to create
pressure equalized cells. Provide vertical baffling at each
floor and horizontal baffling at maximum 9 meters on center.
n. Locate primary framing member interface seal at inboard
glass line.
o. Vent glazing border cavity to exterior so that pressure differ-
entials during driving rain conditions will not drive rain past
outer glazing cap.

B. Door and Window Hardware

1. Hinges for doors shall comply with the requirements of ANSI A156.1
or any other equivalent Standard. They shall be provided according to
the required grades and meet the respective test requirements
2. Hinges shall be of stainless steel 316, brass, bronze, aluminum .
3. The size of the hinges shall be adequate for the respective door
weight and size and comply with manufacturer's data.
4. Friction pivots and sliding stays shall be stainless steel capable of
providing a maximum opening of 100° and with a minimum clearance
of 100mm between the frame and window for cleaning purposes.
5. Locks shall be cadmium-plated steel with stainless steel or brass
parts.
6. Pull handles shall be anodized aluminum.
7. Side and top hung windows shall be fitted with friction pivots, sliding
stays, casement fastener or pull handle, and locking handle. Case-
ment
fasteners and locking handles shall be dual where required.
8. Sliding windows shall be fitted with rollers, guides and similar fittings,
pull handle and stops and sliding bolts or locking mechanism. The
window
shall be constructed such that it cannot be lifted off its rollers without
the
removal of a safety device.
9. Flyscreens shall be fitted on the inside surface with frames of ex-
truded aluminum and plastic covered mosquito gauze of 7 x 7 mesh
per 10 mm
square. Screens shall be fixed to window frames by wing nuts. The
windows shall be fitted with locking handles and an opening and clos-
ing
mechanism comprising a cam handle and roto operator.
10. Bolts for windows shall be of steel with non-corrosive finish. They
shall be mortised into the rebate with minimum of bolts each 30 cm.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

96
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 11. Ball bearings for the steel doors: Hinges of grade 1 and 2 shall have
ball bearings. They shall be of stainless steel for stainless steel and
non-ferrous type hinges.
C. Glass
1. Clear Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Qual-
ity q3.
2. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1
clear, Quality q3. Kind FT fully tempered (toughened).
3. Clear Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat,
Class 1 clear, Quality q3. Kind HS heat strengthened.
4. Tinted Glass: Not allowed.
5. Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II - patterned and wired flat, Class 1 -
clear, Quality q8.
6. Patterned Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II - patterned and wired flat, Class
1 - clear, Quality q7.
7. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Qual-
ity q1.
D. Accessories:
a) Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM.
b) Spacers: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM.
c) Glazing Gaskets
1. Dense compression gaskets: As per system provider recom-
mendations, complying with ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM,
or/and ASTM C1115, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rub-
ber, molded or extruded shape to fit glazing channel retaining
slot; black color.
2. Soft compression gaskets: ASTM C509, Type II, black, ex-
truded, neoprene, EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin
rubber, of profile and hardness required to maintain water-
tight seal. D. Contact Sealant (if applicable):
i. Type: Single component, medium modulus,
neutral moisture curing silicone sealant;
ASTM C1184 and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G and A.
ii. Movement capability: 50 percent in exten-
sion and compression.
iii. Compatible with glass unit edge seals;
tested to ASTM C1294.
iv. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's
full color range.
d) Weather-seal Sealant (where applicable):
1. Type: Single component, low modulus, neutral moisture cur-
ing silicone sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
2. Movement capability: 50 percent in extension and compres-
sion.
3. Compatible with glass unit edge seals; tested to ASTM C1294.
4. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. F.
Butt Joint Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25; single component silicone, low modulus type, non-
sag, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.
G. Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O, size and density to
control glazing sealant depth and produce optimum glazing
sealant performance.
e) Primer: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer.
f) Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips, or Stainless-steel
J-profile channels. Plastic rosettes are not allowed.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

97
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 g) Mirror Frame: Roll formed stainless steel channel, with mitered cor-
ners.
h) Laminating interlayer Film:
1. For internal installations: Use Standard Polyvinyl butyral sheet
(PVB), minimum 0.76mm thick for annealed glass composition
and minimum 1.14mm thick for heat treated glass composi-
tion.
2. For outside insulations:
v. Only use Sentry Glass Plus (SGP) interlayer if
at least one glass edge is exposed.
vi. The use of standard PVB is only allowed if all
the edges of the laminate are protected
with a manufacturer recommended edge
seal and is fully concealed in a metal frame.
3. EVA and resin interlayers are not allowed.

13.7 Executions
13.7.1 Preparation
A. Removing the easing wooden window and doors.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that con-
tain soap, oil, or silicone, dust.
13.7.2 Installation
A. Installation Glass:
a. Clean glazing rabbets; remove loose and foreign matter.
b. Install glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's instructions.
c. Maintain manufacturer's recommended edge and face clearances be-
tween glass and frame members.
d. Installation - Structural Silicone Glazing Method
i. Mask aluminum and glass surfaces adjacent to sealant pock-
ets.
ii. Install temporary glass retainers to align faces of glass.
iii. Apply contact sealant; completely fill pockets. Tool joints and
remove masking tape before sealant skim cure begins.
iv. Allow sealant to cure minimum time required by manufac-
turer.
v. Remove temporary glass retainers.
vi. Insert joint backing to fill void between glass unit edges and
glass spacer.
vii. Mask both sides of glass for full length of joint.
viii. Apply weather seal sealant; tool to smooth, slightly concave
profile.
e. Installation - Silicone Glazing Method
i. Mask both sides of joint for full length.
ii. Install temporary glass retainers to align faces of glass.
iii. Provide temporary joint backing for one side of joint.
iv. Apply sealant to completely fill spaces; tool to smooth,
slightly concave surface.
v. Allow sealant to cure minimum time required by manufac-
turer. Remove temporary backing and fill voids with addi-
tional sealant.
f. Installation - Mirrors
i. For screw hanged mirrors: pre-drilled fixing holes. Mirrors
shall have (5x5) mm stainless steel frame. Mirrors shall be
fixed with 1.5 mm stainless steel hooks plate glued to back of

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

98
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 mirror, 1.5mm bent stainless steel mirror hook support, 6mm
x 60mm lug screws with plastic lug and self-adhesive as
shown on Detailed Drawing. Thickness of mirror shall be
6mm.
B. Apply to doors and windows as recommended by hardware manufacturer and
as required. Fit locks and latch in their respective doors and remove before
painting. Reinstall after painting of doors is completed. Upon completion, ad-
just and lubricate hardware for proper operation.
C. Install windows, doors, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings,
manufacturer’s data and as herein specified. Set units plumb, level, and true to
line, without warp. Install components in proper alignment and relation to es-
tablished lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor se-
curely in place.
D. Pockets shall be formed in heads, jambs, cills and other parts of structures to
receive fixing lugs. The pockets shall be made good after building in the lugs and
screws to frames. Frames shall be screwed using packing pieces where neces-
sary.
13.7.3 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from plane or locations shown on Shop Drawings: Maximum 3mm in 3
m length or 12mm in any total length.
B. Offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to
end in line: Maximum 1mm.
C. Joint sealer space between curtain wall and adjacent construction: 6mm plus or
minus 3mm.

13.7.4 Protection and cleaning

A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immedi-
ately after application, using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufactur-
ers.
B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Use streamers or
ribbons suitably attached to framing and held free of the glass. Do not apply
warning markings directly to the glass.
C. Protect glass and glazing materials during the construction period so that they
will be without any indication of damage or deterioration at the time of com-
pletion of the Works. Cover glass as required to protect it from welding, sand-
blasting and other activities that might abrade the surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass, during the construction period, which is broken,
cracked, chipped or damaged in any way and from any source, including
weather, vandalism or accidents or that shows failure of insulation seal.
E. When glass is installed adjacent to or below concrete or other masonry surfaces
which are exposed to weather, examine glass monthly during construction.
Wash glass immediately when inspection reveals dirt, scum, deposits or stain-
ing; or after rainstorms, to remove any corrosive wash or dirt which may ad-
here.
F. Wash glass on both faces, not more than 4 days prior to Substantial Completion
of the Works.
G. Protect windows as recommended by manufacturer to ensure that they are
without
damage at time of substantial completion.
13.8 Measurement Method:
Measurements shall be taken accurately in the field, considering the net area of the opening
from the tiles or plastering level, for determining the height and width of the opening, with -
out any exceptions.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

99
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
14. Metal Doors and Frames Work
14.1 General:
Section includes: Metal doors and frames in accordance with the requirements of the Con-
tract
Documents, work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Metal Grill.
2. Door metal frames.
3. Repairing existing metal doors
4. Painting.
5. Installation.
14.2 References: This section should be comply with following :
NFPA (2009 Edition) NFPA (2009 Edition)
BS 1245:1975 Specification for metal door frames (steel)
BS 5499-1 Fire Safety signs, notices, and graphic symbols for fire
BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings
BS 8300:2001 Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of dis-
abled people. Code of practice
BS 5277:1976, EN 24:1975 doors Doors. Measurement of defects of general flatness of door leaves
BS 5278:1976, EN 25:1975 Doors. Measurement of dimensions and of defects of squareness of
door leaves
BS EN 951:1999 Door leaves. Method for measurement of height, width, thickness
and squareness
BS 4652: 2008 Zinc-rich priming paint (Organic Media)
BS 6497: 1984 Specification for powder organic coatings to galvanized steel - BS
6497: 1984
BS EN ISO 1461:2019 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles -
Specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 2081:2018 Metallic and other inorganic coatings - Electroplated coatings of
zinc with supplementary treatments on iron or steel.
ASTM C236: 89 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of
Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box
ASTM C976: 90 Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assem-
blies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box
ASTM E90: 99 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM E413: 87 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
Saudi Arabian Standards

Performance Requirements:
1. Strength Requirement:
 Provide evidence to demonstrate that the works, including ironmongery, have
been tested to meet the minimum acceptance criteria given in DD 171 for the
following:
 Slamming shut impact.
 Slamming open impact.
 Heavy body impact.
 Hard body impact.
 Torsion.
 Download deformation.
 Closure against obstruction.
 Resistance to jarring and vibration.
 Abusive forces on door handles.
2. Ensure that metal doors and frames comply with the minimum requirements of BS
1245
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
100
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3. All Steel sections should comply with ASTM A36/A36M: Standard Specification for Car-
bon Structural Steel
4. The door assemblies, including the installation method within door openings, shall
comply with the following fire rating requirements:
 Copies of test certificates shall be provided to the Engineer prior to manufac-
ture.
 All finishes shall provide the required surface spread of flame characteristics in
accordance with the requirements of Local Building Regulations and the re-
quirements, unless otherwise specified, indicated or agreed.
 All fire doors and frames including fire seals and all associated materials and in-
stallation shall comply with the requirements of the NFPA.
5. Smoke Passage and Air Leakage: The external door sets shall have certification illustrat-
ing conformance with BS 5588.
14.3 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings - Show: Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard
and custom-made metal doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations
of door types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation re-
quirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B. Samples: Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s color charts
showing full range of colors or patterns available for factory-finished doors and frames.
Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
samples not less than (10 × 15) cm and of the same thickness and material indicated for
the final unit of work.
C. Product Data
a. Provide product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details
of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label com-
pliance, sound and insulation ratings, profiles and finishes and manufacturer’s
instructions.
b. Provide manufacturer’s certificates for all elements indicated showing compli-
ance with referenced standards and/ or requirements of local authorities.
14.4 Quality Assurance and QC:
A. Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production ac-
ceptable to the Engineer.
B. Qualifications of Installers
a. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and expe-
rienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the speci-
fied requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work.
b. Contractor’s site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and
at least five (5) years of documented experience.
14.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Deliver metal doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection dur-
ing transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of
factory-finished doors and frames.
B. System components and doors at building site shall be under cover. Place units on mini-
mum 10-cm high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters,
which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper becomes wet during trans-
port, remove carton immediately. Provide minimum 5.0 cm spaces between stacked ele-
ments to promote air circulation.
C. Protect hardware materials during delivery to comply with manufacturer’s directions,
and as required to prevent any damage, especially to plated and polished articles, includ-
ing effects of moisture, condensation and temperature change.
D. Store hardware at building site only originally packed, protect it against dust and dirt and
take care for proper ventilation to prevent condensation.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

101
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
14.6 Products
14.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
No specified manufacturers for this tender, However Products and materials provided
by the contractor shall comply with the requirements of contract documents and sub-
ject to the Employer and Engineer approval and the Engineer and the Employer have
the right to reject any submittal without any liability towards the contract.
14.6.2 Materials
A. Steel :
1. Steel for doors and frames shall comply with the requirements of BS
1245:1975 or equivalent Standards.
2. The thickness of framing-material shall not be less than 1.50 mm
nominal.
3. Provide coating as indicated according to the following Standards:
4. Electrolytic coatings according to BS EN ISO 2081:2018 or an equiva-
lent Standard.
5. Hot dip galvanized coatings according to BS EN ISO 1461:2019 or an
equivalent Standard.
6. Powder organic coating to galvanized steel according to BS 6497 or an
equivalent Standard.
7. Metallic zinc-rich priming paint, complying with BS 4652: 2008 or an
equivalent Standard.

B. General
1. All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, especially trained
and experienced in this type of work.
2. A high degree of accuracy is required in the fabrication and installa-
tion of the work.
3. Carry out all work and use all materials in accordance with the manu-
facturer's printed recommendations.
4. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape and with all
exposed surfaces and edges true and free from irregularities and de-
fects, using techniques that will not impair the strength of materials
used.
5. The works elements shall be square, regular to level and plane with
all junctions fitting to the stated tolerances.
6. Ensure that the shadow gaps indicated on the design are maintained
at the head and jamb conditions.
7. The Metal Doors installation shall satisfy the criteria specified herein
based on the design intent, as indicated on the Design Drawings. The
Contractor shall submit full technical data/details regarding all fixings
for review by the Engineer. The Contractor shall remain responsible
for the selection of fixings regardless of any approvals given. Unless
otherwise specified, all fixings to be concealed.
8. All visible welds shall be full penetration butt welds ground smooth
and flush, continuous and hand dressed. All shaped steel to be ma-
chine profile (plasma) cut.
9. Welding using E70 to weld all the steel sections.
10. Metal doors shall be fitted so that gaps around the doors are mini-
mized and no greater than 8mm at the threshold and 6mm else-
where.
11. The metal door system shall be rigid and wobble free.
12. The metal door system shall not rattle, squeak or whistle.
13. The metal door system shall be easy to clean and hygienic.
14. The metal door system shall be easily operable by one person.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

102
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 15. Door framework shall be mortised and adequately reinforced to re-
ceive pivots, door guides, strikes, locksets, closers, floor bolts, and all
ironmongery details indicated on the
16. Design Drawings and ironmongery schedule
17. All holes for ironmongery shall be predrilled.
C. Repair:
1. dismantling for the existing door then install it again, leveling for the
door, replacing the hinges with 12 mm *12cm *3 with stainless steel
bearings, adding and welding new locked, maintenance for the exist-
ing the manual lacked, filling all around the door frame, sandpaper-
ing, painting with anti-rust, and anti-humidity and salt paint, painting
three layers (water proof) wooden looks Add missing tiles (size and
shape to match the existing).
2. Adding steel plate with 2 mm thickness to cover on the top of the
door with size 1.8x0.8 with L section 4x4x3mm, adjusting the existing
door to be fit on place.
D. TOLERANCES
A. Manufacturing tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 4787, BS
5277, BS 5278 and BS EN 951.
B. The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
i. Length/Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of
1.5mm up to 3000mm and 3.0mm above 3000mm of design
dimension.
ii. Thickness/Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum
allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.

14.7 Executions
14.7.1 Examination
1. Examine existing conditions for compliance with schedules and for com-
pleteness of other trades supposed to be finished before starting of doors
installation.
2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
14.7.2 Protection of Components
A. Do not deliver to Site components, which cannot be put immediately into suit-
able dry, covered storage with a dry floor. Stack on bearers, separated with
spacers to prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.
Where doors are delivered to Site in a finished condition, any necessary protec-
tion shall be provided to the doors when applying coatings to the frames and
the like, allowing sufficient drying times to coatings to ensure that the doors are
not marked in any way with the coating material.
14.7.3 Preparation
A. Examine doors prior to installation. Minor damages may be repaired on site
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable
to the Engineer; otherwise replace damaged items as directed.
B. Verify that doors comply with the requirements in schedules for type, size, loca-
tion and swing characteristic.

14.7.4 Installation
A. Particular attention shall be paid to the interface between the door frames and
new and existing walls when preparing the Shop Drawings and during installa-
tion. Interfacing requirements shall be in accordance with the visual require-
ments as indicated on the Design Drawings.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

103
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 B. During construction, doors shall be protected after fitting and care taken to
avoid fitting any doors and ironmongery whilst "wet" trades are still in progress.
Doors and ironmongery shall be kept away from abrasives, acids and other cor-
rosive materials.
C. Installation of fire door sets/ fire door assemblies shall be in accordance with
the recommendations of the Architectural and Specialist Door Manufacturer's
Association Installation Guide.
D. Installation of fire resisting metal door sets shall be carried out in accordance
with the DSMA door and shutter Manufactures’ Association code of practice
documents CP201.
E. On -Site Dimensions
a. Take responsibility for all dimensions and for checking dimensions on
Site prior to manufacture.
b. Ensure that the Shop Design accommodates any given tolerances and
differences between actual Site dimensions and dimensions shown on
the Design Drawings.
F. Fixings: Fixing centers for door frames: When not predrilled or specified other-
wise, position fixings 150mm from each end of jamb, adjacent to each hanging
point and at 600mm maximum centers.
G. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit
locks and latch in their respective doors and remove before painting. Reinstall
after painting of doors is completed. Upon completion, adjust and lubricate
hardware for proper operation.
H. Install doors, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufac-
turer’s data and as herein specified. Set units plumb, level, and true to line,
without warp. Install components in proper alignment and relation to estab-
lished lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely
in place.
I. Pockets shall be formed in heads, jambs, cills and other parts of structures to
receive fixing lugs. The pockets shall be made good after building in the lugs and
screws to frames. Frames shall be screwed using packing pieces where neces-
sary.
14.7.5 TOLERANCES
A. Assembly: the physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be
properly allowed for in the shop drawings of corresponding sub-elements.
B. Comply with the following tolerances during assembly of components:
a. Level of horizontal members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non- cu-
mulative.
b. Plumb of vertical members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-
cumulative. Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not
deviate by more than the lesser of ±3mm or ±0.075% of design dimen-
sion
c. Bow: The center section of the element shall not bow by more than
the lesser of 3mm or 0.075% of the length of the element measured
from a straight line between the ends of the element.
d. Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than
+1.5mm from a 2m straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel
to the long axis of the element.
e. Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a
2m straightedge placed against it in any direction.
f. Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from
the section at either end of the element.
C. All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregulari-
ties.
a. Twist: +1.5mm – there shall be no warping of frame.
b. . Line of panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

104
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
E. Gaps to head and jambs of doors to frames shall be 3mm all round.
F. Thresholds shall have a 7mm gap where located above a carpeted floor.

14.7.6 Protection and cleaning

A. Protection removal immediately before final inspection, remove protective
wrappings from doors and frames.
14.8 Measurement Method:
Measurements shall be taken accurately in the field, considering the net area of the opening
from the tiles or plastering level, for determining the height and width of the opening, with -
out any exceptions.

15. Plumping Work

15.1 General:
Section includes Toilet equipment; toilet accessories work includes but is not limited to the
following:
1. All the equipment.
2. Fitting.
3. Pipes
15.2 References: This section should be comply with following :
British Standards
Discharge and ventilation pipes and fittings, sand-cast or
BS 416
spun in cast iron
BS 416-1 : 90 Specification for socketless systems
Specification for steel pipes, joints and specials for water and
BS 534 : 90
sewage
Capillary and Compression Tube Fittings of Copper and Cop-
BS 864 : 83
per Alloy
Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubu-
BS 1387 : 85(90) lars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for welding or for
screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
BS 1710 : 89 Identification of pipelines and Services
Specification for elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and
BS 2494 : 90
pipelines
BS 3505 : 98 Identical with ISO 4422
Specification for carbon steel pipes and tubes with specified
BS 3601 : 87(93)
room temperature properties for pressure purposes
Austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes for pressure pur-
BS 3605
poses
BS 3605-1 : 91 Specification for seamless tubes
Joints and Fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure
BS 4346
pipes
Injection moulded unplasticized PVC fittings for solvent weld-
BS 4346-1 : 98 ing for use with pressure pipes, including potable water sup-
ply
BS 4346-2 : 98 Mechanical joints and fittings, principally of unplasticized PVC
Specification for unplasticized PVC soil and ventilation pipes,
BS 4514 : 83(98)
fittings and accessories
Specification for polypropylene waste pipe and fittings (exter-
BS 5254 : 76(98)
nal diameter 34.6 mm, 41.0mm, and 54.1mm)
BS 5255 : 89(98) Specification for thermoplastic waste pipe and fittings
Specification for glass reinforced plastics (GRP) pipes, joints
BS 5480 : 90
and fittings for use for water supply or sewerage

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

105
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Design, Installation, Testing and Maintenance of Service Sup-
BS 6700 : 97 plying Water for Domestic Use within Buildings and Their
Curtilages
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for wa-
BS-EN 545 : 95
ter pipelines. Requirements and test methods
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
BS-EN 598: 95
sewerage applications. Requirements and test methods
Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round copper tubes for
BS-EN 1057 : 96
water and gas in sanitary and heating applications
BS-EN 1254 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings
Fittings with end for capillary soldering or capillary brazing to
BS-EN 1254-1 : 98
copper tubes
BS-EN 1254-2 : 98 Fittings with compression end for use with copper tubes
BS-EN 1254-3 : 98 Fittings with compression ends for use with plastic pipes
Fittings combining other end connections with capillary or
BS-EN 1254-4 : 98
compression ends
BS-EN 1254-5 : 98 Fittings with short ends for capillary brazing
German Standard
DVGW Code of Practice (Drinking water supply systems; ma-
DIN 1988
terials, components, appliances, design and installation)
DIN 8076 Standard for testing metal threaded joints
DIN 8077 Polypropylene (PP) pipe dimensions
Polypropylene (PP) pipes; general quality requirements test-
DIN 8078
ing & chemical resistance of pipes and fittings
DIN 2999 Standards for fittings with threaded metallic inserts
Pipe joint assemblies and fittings for type 1 & 2 polypropy-
DIN 16962-1 lene (PP) pressure pipes; bends produced by segment inserts
for buff welding dimensions
DIN 16928 Installation, pipe and fitting connections
DVS 2207 Welding of thermoplastic pipes and fittings
Welding machines & devices for thermoplastic pipes and fit-
DVS 2208
tings
Suitability of non-metallic products for use in contact with
BS 6920 water intended for human consumption with regard to their
effect on the quality of the water
DIN 16836 Multilayer Pipes-General Requirement and Testing
Saudi Arabian Standards
Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes for Potable Wa-
SASO 14
ter
Methods of Testing Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC)
SASO 15
Pipes for Potable Water
SASO 77 Grey cast iron pressure pipes
SASO 78 Methods of testing grey cast iron pressure pipes
SASO 238 Domestic water meters
Steel Pipes – Plan end, alloy and non-alloy – Wall thickness
SASO 726
and dimensions
Pressure Pipelines Components – Definition of Nominal Size
SASO 728
(Nominal Diameter) –Nominal Pressure
Horizontal potable water tanks made of polyester resins
SASO 826
(Glass fibre reinforced)
SASO 859 Threaded steel pipes

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

106
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 Black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipes suitable for
SASO 1011
screwing
SASO 1013 Welded plain-ended steel tubes and pipes for general use
Socket and spigot ductile cast iron pipes for pressure pipe-
SASO 1014
lines
SASO 1015 Ductile iron pressure pipelines - Flanges
Ductile cast iron pipes – External coating by zinc metal spray-
SASO 1016
ing and bituminous material finishing layer – Methods of test
Ductile cast iron pipes – External coating by zinc metal spray-
SASO 1017
ing and bituminous material finishing layer
SASO 1018 Flanged ductile iron pipes for pressure pipelines
Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories for pressure pipe-
SASO 1019
lines – Test methods
Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories for pressure pipe-
SASO 1020
lines – General requirements
SASO 1021 Ductile iron fittings and accessories for pressure pipelines
Ductile iron pipes for pressure pipelines – Centrifugal cement
SASO 1022
mortar lining – Methods of test
Ductile iron pipes for pressure pipelines – Centrifugal cement
SASO 1023
mortar lining – General requirements
SASO 1305 Water centrifugal pumps – General requirements
SASO 1401 PE Pipes for general purposes
SASO 1402 Methods of testing polyethylene pipes for general purposes
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipes for hot
SASO 1517
and cold water uses.

BS EN ISO 2081:2018 Metallic and other inorganic coatings - Electroplated coatings

of zinc with supplementary treatments on iron or steel.
ASTM C236: 89 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance
of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box
ASTM C976: 90 Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building
Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code chapter 9: Plumbing fixtures
IPC International Plumping Code
Performance Requirements:
6. Strength Requirement:
 Provide evidence to demonstrate that the works, including ironmongery, have
been tested to meet the minimum acceptance criteria given in DD 171 for the
following:
 Slamming shut impact.
 Slamming open impact.
 Heavy body impact.
 Hard body impact.
 Torsion.
 Download deformation.
 Closure against obstruction.
 Resistance to jarring and vibration.
 Abusive forces on door handles.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

107
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 7. Ensure that metal doors and frames comply with the minimum requirements of BS
1245
8. All Steel sections should comply with ASTM A36/A36M: Standard Specification for Car-
bon Structural Steel
9. The door assemblies, including the installation method within door openings, shall
comply with the following fire rating requirements:
 Copies of test certificates shall be provided to the Engineer prior to manufac-
ture.
 All finishes shall provide the required surface spread of flame characteristics in
accordance with the requirements of Local Building Regulations and the re-
quirements, unless otherwise specified, indicated or agreed.
 All fire doors and frames including fire seals and all associated materials and in-
stallation shall comply with the requirements of the NFPA.
15.3 Definitions.
A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage
from building.
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.
C. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors
from fixtures and equipment throughout the building. E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage pip-
ing, under pressure.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
a. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
b. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene polymer, rubber.
c. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
d. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
e. PP: Polypropylene.
Performance Requirements
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the fol-
lowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
b. Storm Drainage Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water). 3) Sewage, Force-Main
Piping Systems: 690 kPa (100 psig).
c. The water distribution system shall be installed and adjusted to use the mini-
mum quantity of water consistent with proper performance and cleaning.
d. The sanitary sewerage system shall provide an adequate circulation of air in all
pipes with no danger of siphonage, aspiration, or forcing of trap seals under con-
ditions of ordinary use.
e. Sanitary sewerage systems in the desert area shall be so installed, that soil water
containing excreta is kept separate from the other waste water, therefore a
split-pipe system is necessary.

15.4 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings - Show:
a. Vertical section profile drawings showing pipe sizes and manholes, locations, ele-
vations, and other piping in the same trench, including connections to the public
water supply. Diagrammatic drawing(s) identifying all valves and their function.
b. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for
selecting seismic restraints.
B. Samples:
a. Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation and finish require-
ments.
b. approved full size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C.
Product Schedule:
i. Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
108
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 ii. Identify locations using room designations indicated.
iii. Identify products using designations indicated.
c. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
C. Product Data
a. Manufacturer’s product description and recommended installation instructions
for each plumbing equipment, plumbing fixture category , and pipes specified.
Include selected fixture, trim fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances,
equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construc-
tion details, and flow control rates. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance
requirements..
15.5 Quality Assurance and QC:
A. Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e. indicat-
ing day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor if necessary.
B. Reports and records shall be available to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after
testing and checking.
C. Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure traceabil-
ity.
D. Arrangements shall be made in Contractor’s work schedule and time allowed for checking
and testing as indicated.
E. Qualifications of Installers
a. Contractor’s site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience in works related to plumbing pip-
ing and shall have successfully completed works similar in design, material, and
extent to that indicated in the Project.
b. Installers shall be familiar with the material and installation procedures indicated
and shall be skilled and trained.
c. Contractor’s personnel performing disinfection of the water distribution system
shall be familiar with the physiological, chemical, and physical properties of the
chemicals being used and shall be trained and equipped to handle any emer-
gency which may arise.
15.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A. Whether moved by hands, hoists, or other acceptable method, pipes, components and
equipment shall not be thrown, dropped, dragged, bumped, or allowed to impact on ob-
jects that cause damage.
B. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. Pipes and fittings shall be kept free
of dirt and debris, pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
C. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and
chemical or mechanical injury.
D. Storage of plastic pipes shall be on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably so as not to allow
deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports.
E. Stacking of pipes shall be limited to a height that will not cause extensive deformation of
the bottom layers of pipes under anticipated temperature conditions. Special attention
shall be given to the ends of each pipe section so that the outer roundness of the pipe re-
mains virtually unchanged.
F. Plastic pipes, fittings or castings that have been in contact with gasoline, lubricating oil or
aromatic compound shall not be stored or installed.
15.7 Products
15.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Sanitary fixtures shall have smooth impervious surfaces, be free from de-
fects and concealed fouling surfaces, and shall conform in quality and de-
sign to one of the standards mentioned in this specification
B. Each fixture and device used shall have cast, stamped, or indelibly marked
on it the maker’s mark or name and the type of the product, when such
marking is required by the approved standard that applies.
C. All fixtures shall be new and of first quality, free from scale, lamination
and other defects.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
109
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. Flexible wall supplies shall be with wheel handle control stop, escutcheon
and flexible tube riser.
E. Sizes and colours of sanitary fixtures shall be as specified in the Project
Documents.
15.7.2 Materials
A. POLYPROPYLENE PIPES AND FITTINGS (PP):
1. Company with
DIN 1988 DVGW Code of Practice (Drinking water supply
systems; materials, components, appliances, design and installa-
tion)
DIN 8076 Standard for testing metal threaded joints
DIN 8077 Polypropylene (PP) pipe dimensions
DIN 8078 Polypropylene (PP) pipes; general quality re-
quirements testing & chemical resistance of pipes and fittings
DIN 2999 Standards for fittings with threaded metallic in-
serts
DIN 16962-1 Pipe joint assemblies and fittings for type 1 & 2
polypropylene (PP) pressure pipes; bends produced by segment
inserts for buff welding dimensions
DIN 16928 Installation, pipe and fitting connections
DVS 2207 Welding of thermoplastic pipes and fittings
DVS 2208 Welding machines & devices for thermoplastic
pipes and fittings
2. Soundproof Drainage pipe should be manufactured in accordance
with DIN EN in building and for laboratory installation inside the
building structure and is approved by the German Institute of Building
Technology (DIBt), approval number should be clear on both pipes
and fittings.
3. (The pipes should be made of Polypropylene with Mineral reinforced
Polypropylene middle layer; density should not be less than 1.9 g/
cm³.
4. Pipes with Pn 25 with Aluminium thickness 0.2 mm According to din
8077/78 Special technology with black layer (uv resistant ) for out
door and external installations under sunlight
5. The pipes and fittings should be tested in accordance to DIN EN
14366, DIN 4109 and should have results in UG rear at 4L/S flow rate
of 18dB(A) with sound proof clamps and 25dB(A) with normal clamps
-for vertical installations.
6. Behavior in fire: to correspond to B2 normally flammable (as per the
B2 classification) according to DIN 4102 and D-S3, d0 according to EN
13501-1.
7. Pipes and fittings should be pre-installed with a lip-sealing ring.
8. Material: SBR or EPDM
9. Pipes, fittings and floor traps to withstand a continuous operating
temperature of 90°C, and 95°C for brief load and should have a chem-
ical resistance range of pH 2 to 12
10. All fittings should be of PP-MD (Mineral reinforced Polypropylene)
from the same manufacturer, DIBt approval number should be clear
on each fitting.
11. Pipe installation clamps, supports and other related accessories shall
be of the type to suit the soundproof/low noise piping installations.
The same to be as per the recommendations of the piping manufac-
turer.
B. Above Ground Soil, Waste, Overflow and water Systems (for above
ground drainage installations):

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

110
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 1.
UPVC pipes, traps and fittings shall be manufactured under a BS 4514
- EN1329 -1 or equivalent DIN 8061 / DIN 8062 standards Quality sys-
tem and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same
manufacturer allowing the easy plumbing of an installation.
2. The system shall comply with appropriate British Standards and
where applicable, bear the Kite mark.
3. Materials and Colour: pipes and fittings shall be in UPVC in grey or
rustic brown.
4. Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain-ended pipes. Seal
ring expansion joints shall be provided where required.
5. The system shall be compatible with the buried drain system. Weath-
ering Apron (solvent weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil,
waste, vent pipes for weather flashing around pipe at roof.
6. Seal ring socket type PVC caulking bush shall be used to connect PVC
pipes to sockets of other material if applicable.
7. Adjustable, plastic coated steel holder bats shall be used to support
pipes or secure fittings. Galvanised mild steel support bracket with
packing piece shall be used for horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and
fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated steel brackets.
8. Floor drains shall be P- trapped and shall be provided with 200 x 200
nickel coated brass cover including strainer.
C. . Below Ground Drainage and Sewerage System:
1. The below ground drainage and Sewerage shall be of UPVC pipes and
fittings and shall comply with BS 4660, 5481 EN-1401-1:1998 PN-16 or
equivalent or DIN 8061 / DIN 8062 standards suitable for Below
ground application.
2. Seal retaining caps and seal rings are black. Rodding eyes shall be
provided where required.
3. UPVC solvent weld socket seal/lip and lip seal/lip seal shall be used.
4. Where necessary, lip seal/lip seal slip couplings shall be used.
5. Transition from higher dia. to lower one shall be made by using level
invert taper. Special adaptors and caulking bush shall be used to join
UPVC channels in manhole connections to drainage system.
6. UPVC Puddle flanges shall be provided where pipe work passes
through the walls or roofs or structural slabs.
7. Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non-pressure
pipe work or BS 4346: Part 3 for pressure pipe work.
8. Sealing Rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber com-
plying with BS2494.
D. UPVC PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS
1. UPVC pressure pipes and fittings manufactured to DIN standards suit-
able for pressure (12 bar) PN12.
2. All UPVC pipework shall be ultraviolet resisting.
3. UPVC socket or threaded fittings of the same rating as pipes.
E. Special Pipe Fittings
4. Flexible, non-pressure Pipe Couplings: elastomeric, sleeve-type, re-
ducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as
piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
5. Shielded Non pressure Pipe Couplings: elastomeric or rubber sleeve
with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resis-
tant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
6. Rigid, Unshielded, Non pressure Pipe Couplings: sleeve-type reducing-
or transition type mechanical coupling molded from TPE material with
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

111
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 7. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged
and mechanical joint ends. Include gasketed ball-joint section and
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.
8. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consist-
ing of telescoping sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-
iron, bell-and-spigot end sections. Select and assemble components
for expansion indicated. Include ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
9. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting
with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gas-
kets, and restrained-joint ends. Include ductile-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.

15.8 Executions
15.8.1 Examination
1. Immediately before laying, examine accessories, each pipe and joint again
for soundness and cleanliness and make sure that material and surfaces
which form part of a joint are clean and dry before commencing their as-
sembly. All defective material shall be replaced. Check that the position
and levels of existing drains and services have been established.
2. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping sys-
tems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that loca-
tions and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those
indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's
roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated..
15.8.2 Preparation
A. Where pipes are generally provided with flexible joints, locate joint po-
sitions as closely as practicable to the external faces of structures and
the like, through which the pipes are laid. Where pipes are generally
laid with rigid joints and there is no specified provision for flexible
joints at the above positions, get instructions of the Engineer, if it is re-
quired that such provisions are necessary.
B. All metal water pipes shall be bonded to the electrical installation main
earth terminal as near as possible unless otherwise indicated.
C. Gaskets, seals, sleeves, couplings etc. shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations for use of lubricants, solvent
cements, glue, etc. and other installation requirements.
D. Where pipe routing is left to the contractor's discretion, he shall after
receipt of the construction drawings prepare detailed and accurate
pipe arrangement plans and obtain Engineer’s approval early enough
to ensure that the necessary slots and recesses are provided. The Engi-
neer’s approval shall not be deemed to limit the contractor's responsi-
bility in any way.
E. Clearances shall be considered under beams, over windows and in sus-
pended ceilings. Piping installation shall be co-ordinated with duct-
work, lighting and other trades.
F. Vertical pipes shall be plumb, horizontal pipes shall be level, and where
two or more adjacent pipes extend in the same direction, they shall be
parallel.
15.8.3 Installation
A. Piping Installation
1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains
connect to building sanitary sewers.
2. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary
force-main piping.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
112
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 3.
Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through
foundation wall. Make installation watertight.
4. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping
using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary
tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if
change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-
turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed
back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, el-
bows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction
of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers
and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of
drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
5. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each sys-
tem. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install re-
quired gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use
of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain
swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
6. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following mini-
mum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
i. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of
flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 75) and smaller; 1 percent down-
ward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 110) and larger.
ii. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in
direction of flow. 3) Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward ver-
tical fixture vent or toward vent stack. L. Sleeves are not re-
quired for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-
ongrade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
7. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected
and approved by the Engineer
B. Valve Installation
1. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2) Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff
valve, on each sewage pump discharge.
4. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage
backflow.
i. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally
closed type, unless otherwise indicated.
ii. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has
integral backwater valve.
iii. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.

C. Connections
1. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and special-
ties.
2. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping.
Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
3. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
i. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
ii. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent
piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by au-
thorities having jurisdiction.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

113
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 iii. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing
code.
iv. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide
shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection.
Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN
65) and larger.
4. Connect force-main piping to the following: Sanitary Sewer: To exte-
rior force main or sanitary manhole. 2) Sewage Pumps: To sewage
pump discharge.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fas-
teners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manu-
facturer. Install level, plumb and firmly anchored in locations and at heights in-
dicated.

15.8.4 Testing
A. The test pressure shall not be less than 1.5 times the rated pressure for the
weakest part of the pipeline.
B. All intermediate control vales shall be open throughout the duration of the test.
If a network is tested by sections, the ends shall be temporarily closed by
means of suitable joints. Air vents at high points shall be open during the filling
of the network.
C. Slowly fill the pipes with potable water starting from the lowest point, thus
avoiding water hammer and removing all air.
D. Once the network has been completely filled with water, leave the pipeline to
rest for 24 hours. Close the air vents and carry out an initial inspection to check
that all the joints are leaktight.
E. Slowly increase the pressure, using a hand pump, until the required pressure is
obtained. A preliminary application of pressure for 15 min may be made before
the test, so that the elements in the pipeline can settle. For pipelines with diam-
eters of DN 600 or larger, motor pumps shall be used.
F. Isolate the pipeline from the test pump for at least 1 hour. The test is consid-
ered satisfactory if the quantity of water required for re-establishing the re-
quired pressure does not exceed the quantity calculated by the following for-
mula:
G. 3 Litres per kilometre of pipe, per 25 mm of internal diameter, per 0.3 MPa (3
bar) of test pressure, and per 24 hours.
H. For pipe sections not exceeding 30 m in length and 63 mm in diameter, the
pressure loss after the test period of 1 hour shall not exceed 0.05 MPa (0.5 bar).
I. Recording Results of Field Quality Control: For every test and visual inspection,
record the following information and provide copies to the Engineer as re-
quired:
i. -the location of pipeline or other item inspected or tested and
the date of the inspection or test.
ii. Test Pressure
iii. Duration of the test
iv. Serial number of the calibrated pressure gauge used in the
record-the results
v. -the personnel involved
15.8.5 Protection and cleaning
A. After the completed pipelines are tested and approved, the entire sanitary sew-
erage and stormwater drainage system shall be thoroughly flushed with water
until all dirt and mud have been removed.
B. Protect completed sections of pipelines from damage by construction traffic
and work of other trades.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

114
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 C. Place plugs in ends of incomplete pipes at the end of the day or when work
stops.

16. Electrical Works

16.1 General Requirement

16.1.1 Technical Specification
This specification covers the methods, materials and standards that shall be used for the electrical and
telecommunication works and services for building.
16.1.2 Codes And Standards
All materials and equipment used in electrical installations shall comply as a minimum with the latest relevant
recommendation(s) or specification(s) of the local authority. In the absence of such recommendation(s) or
specification(s) all such materials shall comply with the latest recommendation(s) or specification(s) of the
British Standard Specifications (BSS) and if these are not available to the latest relevant International Electro-
Technical Commission (IEC). If standards mentioned above contradict with the specification, then the require-
ments of this specification shall apply.
A. Electrical installation shall conform to the latest editions and is to be executed in accordance with the
following codes and standards.
1. BSI - British Standards Institution.
2. BS - British Standards.
3. EN - European Standard
4. BSEN - British Standards implementations of English language versions of European stan-
dards.
5. IEE - Institution of Electrical Engineers 18thedition with all current additions and amend-
ments.
6. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
7. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
8. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
9. ISO - International Organization for Standardization
10. IEC 60364 - Electrical Installations of Buildings.
11. IEC 60621 - Electrical Installations for outdoor site under heavy conditions.
12. BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations.
13. Requirements or Standards stated elsewhere within this Specification.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

115
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
In case of any discrepancy or conflict between BS and IEC standards the former shall prevail unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. The entire completed electrical installations shall be to the satisfaction of the Engi-
neer.
B. Reference to codes and standards in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to include the latest
edition or issue of such codes and standards except when otherwise is specifically indicated.
C. When codes or standard are not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents, work, materials,
equipment, performance, in-shop and at-site tests, installation and manufacturing methods shall con-
form as a minimum to the acceptable relevant national or international codes and standards.
D. All installed material and equipment shall be new, with best quality and design, and free from defects
and imperfections.
E. All the installation and adjustment of material and equipment shall be done by experienced electri-
cians, has proper trade and all workmanship shall be first class.
F. Installed material and equipment included in the work shall be protected from dirt and damage and
maintained in a clean condition during the performance of the work.
G. Apparatus, equipment, and material required for the performance of the work shall be stored under
requirements of applicable regulations and of direction from the Architect.
H. The Contractor shall cooperate with all other Contractors on the project, be responsible for prompt de-
livery of all materials and equipment's and for the installation of all works under this division at a time
and in a manner so that there will be no delay in the construction schedule.
I. Acceptance of the work shall be subject to the condition that all installed systems, equipment, appara-
tus and appliances included in the work shall operate and perform as designed and as selected with re-
spect to efficiency capacity and quietness and shall operate and perform without producing objection-
able noise within occupied area of the building.
J. Acceptance of the work shall be subject to the conditions that any time within one year after date of
final approval, any defective part of the work resulting from the supply of faulty workmanship or ma-
terial shall be immediately amended, repaired, or replaced as a part of the contract work without any
cost to the owner.

16.2 Extend of Work

A. The extent of the electrical works includes the supply of materials and equipment, delivery to the site, labor,
installation, testing and commissioning of all electrical services as detailed or referred to in these specifications
and/or shown in the drawings, including all other associated work such as supporting structure and ancillary
works, attendance, etc., and the like. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, the work shall also include the
supply of electrical power to all electrically operated equipment. The electrical power supply point of all sta-
tionary and electrically operated equipment shall be the supply terminal box on the equipment or its nearby
isolating/starting device if the equipment is supplied with a flexible cable and ready for connection. The electri-
cal services shall be complete and in perfect working order.
B. All equipment and/or accessories not specifically mentioned in the specifications or noted in the drawings,
but which are obviously necessary for the proper and normal operations of the various systems shall be in-
cluded. The Contractor shall provide and execute such works as a part of the contract and shall not be entitled
to any extra payment on the account.
C. Without restricting the generality of the foregoing, the electrical installation of the project includes the sup-
ply and installation and testing the equipment and materials detailed in the following specification sections:
 Equipment Electrical Connections.
 Electrical Raceway System (conduits, trays, ladders, trunking).
 Wires and Cables.
 Wiring Devices.
 Distribution Boards.
 Lighting System.
 Earthing System.
 Fire Alarm and Detection System.

D. All work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with this specifications, and other applicable project spec-
ifications and design drawings.
Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works
116
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
E. The contractor shall carry out a thorough inspection of all items of electrical equipment for damage prior to
locating the equipment and proceeding with the electrical installation. If any damage is evident or suspected, it
shall be reported to the engineer, who will determine the action to be taken and advise the contractor accord-
ingly.
F. No variation shall be permitted without the written consent of the engineer, who shall reserve the right to
request the substitution of the correct materials and/or equipment. Should any replacement be deemed nec-
essary by the engineer, then the contractor shall bear the cost of substitution, and all of associated builder's
work and the making good of finishes attributed to the work or replacement.
G. Any materials and/or apparatus that are supplied by others for installation and/or connection by the con-
tractor shall be examined on receipt to locate any possible defects in such materials and/or apparatus. Should
any defects be found, the contractor shall immediately notify the engineer to ascertain what action is neces-
sary.
H. The contractor shall also allow for storing, putting into position, fixing where necessary, connecting, and
testing such materials and/or equipment.
I. The contractor shall be responsible for the full protection of all materials supplied to him, or handed to him
by others, for incorporating in the works against damage or loss until the works are handed over to the Engi-
neer.
J. If the contractor refuses or neglects to remedy, in a stipulated period, that which the engineer considers to
be in accordance with the General and Particular Specifications and/or associated schedules, and/or associated
drawings, to be caused by bad workmanship the Engineer may, if he wishes, arrange for the work to be carried
out by others and be entitled to deduct the amount paid from the contract sum.
K. Materials shall be in accordance with the General and Particular Specification herein. Where a standard is
not specified, materials shall be warranted for fitness of purpose under the conditions shown and specified.
L. Materials to be supplied by the contractor shall be available on site by the date stipulated in the bar chart.
Any airfreight costs to meet these dates shall be for the Contractor’s account.
M. Where equipment or products are specified to conform to the requirements of a testing agency and label-
ing service of such agency is offered for such equipment or product, the proper label shall be attached to the
equipment or product as proof of conformance.
N. Unless specifically waived in each instance, testing procedures shall be performed in the presence of the En-
gineer.
O. Materials and devices shall be inspected prior to installation by the engineer as part of the work of this sec-
tion before and after installation to ensure that they are of the quality and type specified herein, free of manu-
facturing defects and subsequent damage, and that they have been installed in the proper manner. In all as-
pects the quality of equipment and documentation shall be governed by BS 5750 Quality Systems/ISO9000 to
ISO 9004.
P. The contractor shall obtain the approval of the local authority for all electrical and telephone work to be un-
dertaken. Any modification required by the local authority shall be considered included in the contractor cost.
16.3 Conduct of Work
All work under this Contract which may interfere with the operation of the Owner’s utilities, shall be done in
such a manner and at such time as may be satisfactory to the Owner.
Make temporary alternations and connections as required to execute work so that all services in the building
are maintained with the minimum possible interruption.
Temporary shutdowns shall be segregated and shall be of the shortest possible duration. All services shall be
kept on continuous operation unless permissions are otherwise granted by the Owner.
All temporary wiring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no additional cost of the Owner.
16.4 Service Conditions

A. All electrical equipment, apparatus, accessories and fittings shall be so designed and manufactured to
operate continuously in the electricity supply system having the following characteristics:

1. Voltage: 400 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.

2. Voltage: 220 volts, single phase, 2 wire.
3. Frequency: 50 Hz.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to investigate the exact characteristics of the power supply and to
adapt the design accordingly at no additional cost for the Owner.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

117
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
16.5 Accessibility

A. All works within the project and particularly above suspended ceilings or inside vertical shafts shall be
so installed as to be accessible for operation, maintenance, and repair. Deviations from the drawings
may be made to accomplish this, but no change shall be made without written approval from the En-
gineer.
B. Locations of access doors and panels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation work is
commenced.

16.6 Storage of Materials and Equipment

A. All material and equipment, fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against corrosion, deterioration and
ingress of foreign matter and moisture.

B. All material and equipment shall be kept clear of the floor or ground by means of wooden bearers and
shall be protected against the weather with durable waterproof wrapping and other appropriate
means.
C. The Contractor shall be liable for any loss due to delivery, storage, or site security problems.

16.7 Signs and Notices

A. All signs and notices shall be in Arabic and English with the Arabic version being above or to the right
of the English version.
B. A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic translations shall be approved by the Engi-
neer prior to manufacture.
C. The entire Electrical Installation shall in all respects comply with the requirements of the latest edi-
tions of the following Standards with any current additions and amendments:

16.8 Mounting Height

A. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the following shall be mounting heights of equipment above
finished floor level subject to full coordination with architectural details, medical equipment’s as de-
tailed in the 1/20 Loaded Drawings and other disciplines/equipment. Any discrepancy found between
these heights and other details/disciplines shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for clarifica-
tion and final decision.

Equipment MOUNTING HEIGHTS

Isolating switch 1200 mm
Light switch 1200 mm (100 mm from door frame, horizon-
tally)
Dimmer switch 1200 mm
Fire alarm manual call point 1200 mm
Fire alarm sounder 2400 mm
Fire alarm panel 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL)
Distribution Board 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL)
Power outlet 450 - 1200 mm

B. Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g., light switch and socket outlet) are shown in
approximately the same location, their center lines shall be aligned vertically.
C. Where wall mounted accessories are shown adjacent to each other they shall be mounted with their
wall plates separated by 50 mm.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

118
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
16.9 Equipment Label and Identification

A. All items of electrical distribution equipment and cables, including local disconnectors and switches
controlling fixed equipment and appliances, shall be fitted with identification labels and notices as in-
structed by the Engineer. These labels shall bear the equipment designation as shown on the "As-
Built" Drawings plus the supply voltage, phase, frequency, and distribution circuit number.

B. Switchgear shall (in addition to the identification labels) be fitted with a stainless-steel plate fixed in a
prominent position and engraved "DANGER VOLTS" together with the generally adopted “double
flash” danger signal. A number indicating the nominal system shall prefix the word “VOLTS”. The let-
ters shall be 12mm minimum height in signal red code 537 to BS 381C.

C. Switchgear shall (in addition to the identification labels) be fitted with a stainless-steel plate fixed in a
prominent position and engraved "DANGER VOLTS" together with the generally adopted “double
flash” danger signal. A number indicating the nominal system shall prefix the word “VOLTS”. The let-
ters shall be 12mm minimum height in signal red code 537 to BS 381C.

D. The interior of each item of 3-phase equipment shall be clearly marked to show the phases. For this
purpose, either colored plastic discs screwed to fixed components or identification by means of col-
ored plastic sleeving shall be employed.

E. All labels and notices shall be engraved in the English language. Danger labels shall be engraved in
Arabic and English.

F. All cabinets and boxes shall bear clear external marking of their function and the areas covered.
G. All barrier strip outlets and inputs from main equipment shall be labelled as above by means of solidly
mounted engraved plastic strips held in by means of non-corroding flush head screws.
H. All labels shall be of two- or three-layer laminated plastic and shall be fixed by means of screws.
I. General information labels must have block characters on a white background with characters not
less than 6 mm high.
J. Warning labels must have black characters on a yellow background with characters not less than 8
mm high and not more than 25mm.
K. Mandatory labels must have white characters on a blue background with characters not less than 8
mm high and not more than 25mm.
L. All fuse boards, distribution boards and switchboards shall be fully labelled, a main label shall be fixed
to the front of the board detailing the heading or name it appears on the schematic/wiring diagram
and the source of the cable feeding the distribution board.
M. All sub-circuits in distribution boards and fuse boards shall be correctly and clearly labelled in ink or
type setting.
N. All sub-circuits label diagram attached to the inside of the distribution board cover shall also be
marked up to indicate the electrical drawing number of the system being fed from the distribution
board.

16.10 As-built Drawings

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate from time to time, as required by the Engineer, during the execu-
tion of the Works that adequate and accurate records are being kept such as will ensure the ultimate
completeness and accuracy of the As-Built Drawings and that the records drawings are themselves
being progressively completed as the work proceeds on Site.
B. The Contractor will be responsible for the preparation of "As Built" Drawings and will supply these
bound in folios in accordance with the Engineer's instructions and to the Engineer's and Client's satis-
faction. The finished As Built Drawings are to be of a high standard.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

119
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 C. All drawings prepared or amended by the Contractor to show the Works as constructed shall be
known as "As Built" Drawings. All such drawings shall be prepared using S.I. Units and shall have the
size of the Contract Drawings.
D. Not more than 4 weeks after the data of the completion of the inspections or such other period of
time as may be agreed with the Engineer, the Contractor will submit for the Engineer's approval two
paper prints of each of the drawings.
E. After checking the prints of "As Built" Drawings submitted by the Contractor the Engineer will return
to the Contractor one copy marked to show his signed approval or comments.
F. In the event of the Engineer's approval not being given, the Contractor shall alter the drawings in ac-
cordance with the Engineer's specific comments and shall re-submit them to the Engineer within a pe-
riod of two (2) weeks from receipt by the Contractor of the Engineer's comments.
G. When the contractor has obtained from the Engineer a signed approved paper copy prints of each "As
Built" Drawing, the Contractor will provide to the Engineer a reproducible copy of each approved "As
Built" Drawing which the Engineer shall check, and sign approved and return to the Contractor. The
Engineer's approval of "As Built" Drawings shall in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibil-
ity for ensuring the accuracy of all information shown on all such drawings.
H. Following receipt of the signed approved reproducible "As Built" Drawings the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer Two (2) sets of reproducible copies and Six (6) sets of paper copies of all approved
and signed "As Built" Drawings bound and presented in drawing folios as described hereunder.
I. A complete set of contractor’s As Built Drawings shall be submitted in ACAD format in duplicate on
computer diskettes or laser disk.
J. The "As Built" Drawings shall accurately show the installed conditions of:
1. All equipment, conduits, trunking, lighting fixture, receptacle, and switch outlet locations, etc.
2. Circuit lists for each distribution board and such lists shall agree with lists fixed within distribution
board doors.
3. Positions and nature of all earth electrodes installed and the route of the connecting copper con-
ductors.
4. Complete electrical circuit details including lighting and power points suitably referenced to indi-
cate type of fittings.
5. Schematic diagrams, single line diagram, control wiring diagram and lighting fixture schedule, dis-
tribution board schedules, cable schedules.
6. Indicate all plant room installations in drawings.
7. Legends which shall detail the symbols used and which shall conform in style and standard to
those used in the working drawings.
8. Underground raceway and duct bank routing.

16.11 Submittals

I. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer Submittals, shop drawings and catalogs for equipment,
materials and other items furnished.
II. Equipment shop drawings and engineering catalogues shall be submitted for the following equipment
and systems as applicable and as specified in each section
1. Distribution Boards.
2. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
3. Power Sockets and outlets.
4. Air-conditioners
5. Fire alarm system
6. Fire extinguishers.
III. The contractor shall check catalogues and shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements
prior to submittal. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating
that the shop drawings conform to the Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all
exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be re-
turned.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

120
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 IV. The engineer's check shall be for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance
with the Specifications and Drawings. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not re-
lieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the
Specifications and Drawings.
V. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades.
VI. The Shop Drawings shall show the position, dimensions, scheme, arrangement and fixing of all electri-
cal equipment.
VII. Rigid non-metallic conduits shall be UPVC high impact and heavy gauge. All conduits and conduit fit-
tings
shall be manufactured and tested generally in accordance with BS 4607 Parts 2, 3, BS 6099/IEC 60614
VIII. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No material
shall be ordered, or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED - CON-
FIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED".
IX. In addition to the manufacturer's equipment shop drawings, the Contactor shall submit electrical in-
stallation working drawings as follows:

1. The Contractor shall prepare, based on the Contract drawings, the electrical installation
working drawings to a scale agreed on with the Engineer and shall issue them in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract having due regard to the time required for approval
procedures.
2. Allowance shall be deemed to have been included in the Tender for the preparation of the
working drawings and for executing any revisions required as directed by the Engineer and
for re-submitting to the Engineer for approval.
3. The Contractor may, in certain cases only, and with the Engineer's permission, complete and
detail some of the Contract drawings and use them as working drawings, but the Contractor
shall be deemed to accept full responsibility in so doing.
4. The electrical installation working drawings shall show the position, dimensions, scheme ar-
rangements and fixing of all electrical equipment. The drawings shall comprise, but are in no
way, limited to the following:

a. Dimensioned drawing of raceway systems showing layout of raceways and fittings, spa-
tial relationships to associated equipment and adjoining raceways, if any.
b. Dimensioned drawings of cable routing showing accurately layouts of cables installations
and their spatial relationship to associated equipment and details of installation.
c. Dimensioned drawings showing accurately scaled layouts of the location of the equip-
ment and their spatial relationship to associated equipment.
d. Dimensioned drawings showing layout of the exact routing of all main earth/earth
loops, details of connectors, earth pits and spatial relationship to associated equipment.
e. Dimensioned drawing of lighting system showing reflected ceiling and lighting, fire de-
tection and sound layout as applicable.
f. Dimensioned drawing of fire alarm, telephone systems and all other auxiliary systems
showing layout plans of all equipment, power supply, details of installation and spatial
relationship to associated equipment.
g. Dimensioned drawing of fire alarm, telephone raceways systems and all other auxiliary
systems showing layout of raceway and fittings spatial relationships to associated equip-
ment and adjoining raceways, if any.
h. Schematic wiring diagram
i. Specific architectural or civil engineering requirements associated with the electrical in-
stallation including substations, generator rooms, and electrical closets shall be detailed
on the drawings.
j. Checking of the Contractor's working drawings and builder's work drawings by the Engi-
neer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for compliance with the de-

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

121
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 sign intent, coordination or with any other obligations and requirements under the con-
tract.
5. Concrete floors and/or walls containing concealed conduits shall not be poured until conduit
layouts are approved.
6. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit operations and maintenance data for equip-
ment furnished. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall in-
clude catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, parts list, etc., to instruct
operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. Manuals shall include
the following as a minimum:
a) A comprehensive index and drawing lists.
b) A complete "As-Built" set of approved shop and working drawings.
c) A complete list of equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and pertinent
data.
d) A table listing of the "as left" settings for all timing relays and alarm and trip set points.
e) System schematic drawings "As-Built", illustrating all components, piping and electric
connections of the systems supplied under this Section.
f) Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied.
g) Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined,
along with special calibration and test procedures.
h) The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire
system, with references to the systems schematic drawings and instructions.
7. Complete parts list with stock numbers, including spare parts.
8. Warranty Certificate.

16.12 Distribution Boards (Mani and Sub-main)

The work to be performed includes, but is not necessarily limited to, all work involved in the supply and instal-
lation of distribution boards as indicated on the drawings and as by the requirements of this Section.
A. The Contractor is responsible for the quality of all its purchased items and as such, must develop and
submit a Supplier Quality Inspection plan for review. The inspection plan shall cover those items in-
tended for shop inspection and the procedures for carrying out the same.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Main Distribution boards shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
manufacture of such equipment and complying with the requirements of the listed standards and
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
2. MDBs equipment shall be assembled and tested in the workshop of the approved local agent
panel builder/ manufacturer. where any equipment needs to be assembled at site, prior Engi-
neers approval is required.
3. Before placing any DB (S), it shall be insured that the physical sizes of equipment, when installed
shall not infringe any clearance required by the concerned local authorities.

16.13 Samples

A. Samples of wires, cables, conduits, boxes, switches, sockets, pushbuttons, and other items shall be
submitted for approval before their acceptance for installation. Catalogue may be submitted in place
of samples, but they should give complete description and specification of materials.
B. Catalogue of major items such as switchgear, transformers, main distribution boards, main and sub
distribution boards, lighting fittings, etc., shall be also submitted for approval before any of these
items are ordered. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any material that he may consider inferior
or unsuitable for any reasons.
C. Further protection of cables and conduits shall be given as instructed by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

122
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
16.14 Quality Assurance

A. Contractor is responsible for the quality of all its purchased items and as such, must develop and sub-
mit a Supplier Quality inspection plan for review by the Engineer.
B. Manufacturer: All components shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
manufacture of components of types, sizes required and complying with the requirements of the
listed standards and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years.
C. Codes and Standards:

Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards, except as herein modified.
A. BSI - British Standards Institution.
B. BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installation.
C. IEE Wiring Regulations.
D. IEC - International Electro Technical Commission. IEC 60364 Electrical installation in buildings.

16.15 Installation

A. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Section shall be subject to change as di-
rected by the Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes.
B. Electrical equipment shall be protected at all times against mechanical injury or damage by water.
Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry perma-
nent shelters. Electrical equipment shall not be installed in its permanent location until structures are
weathertight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly
dried out and tested as directed by the Engineer or shall be replaced at no additional cost at the Engi-
neer's discretion.
C. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at
the Engineer's discretion.
D. Contractor shall repaint any damage to factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by
the equipment manufacturer.

16.16 Inspections, testing, and Acceptance

A. Inspections and tests of materials, equipment, or any part thereof and workmanship shall, if required
by the Engineer, be carried out in the presence of the Engineer, his representatives, or his appointed
inspectors at any stage of manufacture or assembly and the Contractor shall serve adequate written
notice to the Engineer of the proposed dates and locations of such inspections and tests. Such written
notice shall be serviced to the Engineer not less than twenty-one (21) calendar days prior to the date
of such inspections and tests. The Contractor shall provide competent personnel and all apparatus, in-
struments, etc., necessary for such inspections and tests.
B. No inspections or test shall be carried out unless the contractor has in hand, approved drawings and
data of the equipment or materials to be inspected or tested.
C. The contractor shall submit for the Engineer's review, an inspection and tests schedule detailing tests
intended to be conducted at the manufacturer's works. Such schedule shall show the proposed date
and location of inspection and tests.
D. The contractor shall supply any shop or detailed drawings that may be requested by the Engineer, his
representatives or his inspectors during inspection and testing carried out in his or their presence.
E. Materials, equipment, or parts thereof, that do not meet the requirements of the Contract Docu-
ments shall be rejected, removed, replaced, revised and/or retested, whichever applies, until the final
product meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. All work performed to satisfy these re-
quirements and conditions shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. The presence of the Engi-
neer, his representatives or inspectors during inspections and tests shall not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities and obligations under the Contract Documents.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

123
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 F. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
and the relevant approved codes and standards unless otherwise requested or approved by the Engi-
neer.
G. Manufacturer's Test Reports: Unless requirement is waived, submit manufacturer's type test reports
certifying that equipment meets specified standards.

16.17 Maintenance and Warranty

Initial maintenance: For a period of 24 months labor and parts following date when completed and placed in
operation, provide full maintenance. Correct operational faults and restore/replace defective/deteriorated
components and finishes and supply expendable materials as required for proper operations and maintenance.
16.18 Standardization

Materials and products of the same kind and nature shall be the standard product of one manufacturer and of
the same source and an assembly of several components, including enclosures, shall be the standard modular
product of the same manufacturer of such kind of equipment supported by published catalogues (in English)
giving full technical details of all components and finished product or assemblies, standards applicable and evi-
dence that the manufacturer has been involved for at least five (5) years with the professional up-to-date pro-
duction of such equipment.
16.19 Quality and Cleaning

The materials to be used as required by these specifications shall be of the best quality, brand new and of ap-
proved types, obtained from approved manufacturers. Also, all materials shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt,
grease, dust or other foreign matter and shall be free from damage or defects.
16.20 Equipment

A. All manufactured items shall be in strict accordance with the specification and free from imperfections
and defects which affect their appearance, or which may impair their durability and service ability.
B. If the equipment is manufactured under license, the Contractor shall submit a written assurance of the
license (the principal manufacturer) for the design and quality of the equipment produced by the li-
censee. This assurance should be submitted along with the submittals without which submittals will
not be considered.
C. All materials, equipment and components shall be brand new bearing stamped ratings as required, the
best of their respective kind, from reputed manufacturers and shall be suitable for prolonged and trou-
ble-free service under the climatic and other service conditions. When the Engineer will consider it
needed, he may require from the Contractor to supply and install equipment identical to those already
installed at no additional cost or compensation of any nature for the Contractor.
D. Should any equipment or material be subjected to possible damage by water, it shall be dried out thor-
oughly and put through an approved special dielectric test as directed, or otherwise repaired.
E. Equipment or material found defective, damaged by water or otherwise, during storage, installation, or
test, or failing any test, shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor in a manner subject to the ap-
proval of the Engineer.

16.21 Lighting System and Fixtures

The Interior lighting points will comprise the following as a minimum:

A. Embedded, ceiling and wall mounted lighting points shall be used.
B. Lighting installations will be of PVC embedded conduits.
C. PVC conduits will be of heavy gauge type and with size not less than 20mm.
D. The maximum number of PVC wires inside the PVC conduits will be such that a free space of 40% of
the PVC size will be provided.
E. High class 2.5 mm2 stranded copper, PVC insulated, 450/750 Volts wires will be used for lighting cir-
cuits (P+ N+E).
F. Separate protective device (breaker) will be used for each circuit.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

124
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 G. Each lighting circuit comprises number of lighting points based upon the rating of the protection
miniature circuit breaker (MCB).
H. Galvanized steel conduits will be used in exposed installation.
I. MCB’s for lighting circuits will be of 10 Amp. rating, 6kA rupturing capacity.
J. It is strictly forbidden to feed lighting circuits from a socket outlet circuit, and vice versa.
K. Draw boxes and covers, lighting fixtures, distribution boards etc. and anything else is needed to be
fixed on the walls or the ceiling will be fixed by plastic sphenoid and zinc plated self-taping hardened
steel (ZSH) screws. The use of wooden sphenoid or wired is strictly forbidden.
L. Acceptable Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract documents,
acceptable manufacturers are to be firm regularly engaged in the manufacturer of led lighting fixtures
of similar quality whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions.

For each type of led lighting fixtures Contractor shall submit the following details:
1. Catalogue illustrations of luminaire proposed for each specified application.
2. Installation requirements.
3. Photometric curves and is lux diagrams for each luminaire with indication of minimum light output ra-
tio.
4. Luminaires shall be completely self-contained, unless otherwise specified, and include all control
switch, reflectors and diffusers, as required.
5. All Luminaires shall be completely including all control switch, reflectors and diffusers, as required &
must be full- package assembled in the manufacturer factory not somewhere else
6. Luminaires shall be recessed, surface-mounted or suspended as indicated on the drawings, by code
reference and identified in luminaire schedule and data sheets.
7. All diffusers shall be of the light stabilized and non-discoloring type.
8. The design, construction and finish of all luminaires shall be entirely adequate for operation in the
ambient conditions and at the supply characteristics specification. All luminaires shall be designed and
installed to permit easy revamping.
9. All luminaires shall be suitable for connection to rigid conduit, and/or flexible circular sheathed cable.
10. All weather-proof luminaires shall be fully suitable for outdoor use and shall not deteriorate after ex-
tended use in the ambient site conditions state.
11. Ingress protection for indoor use shall be IP20 for the dry places, IP 44 for wet, IP66 for the operation
theaters and high sterilization area.
12. Ingress protection for outdoor lighting shall be IP65, otherwise as specified in the drawings and/or
BoQ.

16.22 LED Luminaires

LED chip shall fulfill the following requirements:

1. CRI greater than 80%.
2. Lumens/W not less than 90 Lum/W.
3. Chip life hour time to be not less than 50,000hr@L80.
4. Complete warranty: 2 years.
5. Pure UGR less than 19.
6. Power factor greater than 0.85.
7. Color Tolerance: less than 3 step MacAdam ellipse.
8. Correlated Color Temperature: 4000 to 6500K.
9. SMD and/or COB CHIPS are accepted only.
10. LED fixture must be led panels lighting not lighting units with led lamps.
11. Standard and tests must comply: FCC, UL-LISTED, CE, TUV, ROHS, LM79, LM80.

16.23 Ceiling Fans

 1200 mm length

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

125
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
  No. of blades:3
 Air delivery: not less than 200CMM.
 speed controller & Remote control
 Metal components must be rust proof
 Input Voltage and frequency: 220-240V, 50 Hz.
 Certification: All related certificates shall be provided such CE, RoHS.
 Warranty at least two years.

16.24 Electrical Connections

A. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, mate and match conduc-
tors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed
equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work.
C. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping, jacket armor and insulation properly to ensure uni-
form and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Brass cable glands shall be used to
terminate armored cables.
D. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing, and
maintenance.
E. Provide PVC-coated conduit and fittings were indicated for highly corrosive atmospheres.
F. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit and flexible wiring for connection of All electrical equipment
where subject to movement and vibration and also where subjected to one or more of the following
conditions:

1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray.
5. Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water.
6. Install disconnect switch, controllers, control stations and control devices as indicated.
7. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated.
8. Provide interconnecting cables, conduits between devices and equipment as indicated.

G. Every connection between conductors and between a conductor and equipment shall provide durable
electrical continuity and adequate mechanical strength.
H. Where a connection is made in an enclosure the enclosure shall provide adequate mechanical protec-
tion against relevant external influences.
I. Every termination and joint in a live conductor or a PEN conductor shall be made within one of the
following or a combination thereof:
1. A suitable accessory complying with the appropriate British Standard.
2. An equipment enclosure complying with the appropriate British Standard.
3. A suitable enclosure of material complying with the relevant glow wire test requirements of BS
6458.
4. An enclosure formed or completed with building material considered to be non- combustible
when tested to BS 476 Part4.
5. An enclosure formed or completed by part of the building structure, having the ignitability char-
acteristics ‘P’ as specified in BS 476 Part 5.
6. Cores of sheathed cables from which the sheath has been removed and non- sheathed cables at
the termination of conduit, ducting or trunking shall be enclosed as required by Regulation 526-
03-02.
7. Except for the following, every connection and joint shall be accessible for inspection, testing and
maintenance.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

126
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 a. Compound-filled or encapsulated joint.
b. Connection between a cold tail and a heating element (e.g. a ceiling and floor heating sys-
tem, a pipe trace-heating system).
c. Joint made by welding, soldering, brazing or compression tool.
16.25 Wires and Cables

1. All wires and cables, except where otherwise stated are to have a soft copper core, refined and
tinned, with an electric conductivity of not less than 98%. The core shall be insulated with rubber with
braid for 600 volley service.
2. Samples of cabling and wiring proposed by the contractor, are to be submitted prior to commence-
ment of the work. These must comply with the requirements of the I.E.E, BS and IEC standards to en-
sure a constant voltage in every part of the building.
3. All wires are to be standard [for lighting and power, the neutral wire shall be different in color from
the phase wires].
4. All wires shall be run through conduits and shall be continuous between outlets and boxes. At least
20cm of wire to be left outside the outlet for fixture connection.
5. Where wire size is shown on drawings or specified, it shall be the same size throughout the circuit.
6. Wiring inside panel boards shall be neat and well arranged, using appropriate lugs for termination and
connection of conductors.
7. Joints in the cables or wires are not allowed to be made inside conduits.
8. Wires are to be fixed to boards with an appliance ensuring perfect electrical contact, to the approval
of the Engineer.
9. When drawing wires through conduits, no lubricant is permitted.
10. Cable shoes have to be used for wires of 6 sq. mm. or above.
11. All boxes and distribution boards have to be carefully cleaned from plaster and other foreign material
before drawing any electrical wires or cables.
12. Colours of the cables should be as follows:
 Single phase circuits:
Brown for the phase
Black for the neutral
Green & Yellow or White for the earth
Blue for direct [switch Wires].
 3 Phase circuits:
Brown, Yellow & Blue for the three phase.
Black for the neutral
Green & Yellow or White for the earth

13. The work to be performed includes, but is not necessarily limited to, all work involved with the supply
and installation of wires and cables and the associated connectors and terminal boards used in electri-
cal power distribution systems.
14. The types of wires and cables specified in this section include the following:
1. Power cables (Insulated & Sheathed)
2. Single Core PVC insulated and sheathed 600/1000V cables.
3. Single core XLPE insulated PVC sheathed (600/1000V) cables.
4. Multicore PVC cables (600/1000V) non-armored cables.
5. Multicore PVC/SWA/PVC cables (600/1000V).
6. Multicore XLPE/PVC (600/1000V).
7. Small power and lighting cables (Insulated)
8. Single core PVC insulated cables (450/750V).
15. The Contractor is responsible for the quality of all purchased items and as such must develop and sub-
mit a supplier Quality Inspection Plan for review.
16. Manufacturer: Cables and wires shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in manu-
facture of cables and wires of types and sizes required and complying with the requirements of the

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

127
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 listed standards and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
17. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the latest edition of the following codes and stan-
dards except as herein specified:

16.26 Split Unit Wall-Mounted Air Conditioner

- General Specifications: Energy Star Certified: Yes

- Cooling Capacity: (18,000 BTU/h)/ (24,000 BTU/h)
- Refrigerant Type: Eco friendly refrigerant R410A or R32
- Compressor Type: Inverter Compressor technology
- Compressor warranty: 5 Years
- Power Source (V/Hz/Ø): 230/50/1
- Control: Microprocessor controlled codeless remote
- Display: LED/LCD
- Remote control distance: Min 10 meters
- Air Direction Control: 4-Way
The outdoor units shall be the factory assembled modular type housed in a sturdy weatherproof cas-
ing constructed from rustproofed mild steel panels and coated with baked enamel finish. They shall
be suitable for side-by-side installation. Power Input should be stated in certified data sheet. Coeffi-
cient of Performance COP, Energy Efficiency ratio EER, Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio SEER, should
be stated in certified data sheet.

16.27 Fire alarm system

The work covered by this specification comprises all materials, installation, labour, services, and all equipment
and materials necessary to install, operate, test, and commission, including, but not limited to, the undermen-
tioned items:
 Main fire alarm control panel.
 Power supply and standby batteries with charger.
 Ionization smoke detectors, heat detectors.
 Manual call points.
 Remote indication lamps.
 Sounders.
 Ancillary services.
 Siting of control equipment, sounders, visual alarm, detectors and manual call points.
 Cabling and wiring.

16.28 Quality Assurance

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all its purchased items and as such, must develop
and submit a supplier quality inspection plan for review. The inspection plan shall cover those items in-
tended for shop inspection and the procedures for carrying out same.
B. Manufacturer: Fire alarm and detection system shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regu-
larly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm and detection system of type and sizes required and comply-
ing with the requirements of the listed standards and whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years and shall be installed by a specialist.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the requirements of the following codes and standards, except as
herein modified:
 BSI - British Standard Institution:
 BS 5445 Components of automatic fire detectors system.
 BS 5446 Components of automatic fire alarm systems for residential purposes.
 BS 5839 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems for Buildings.
 BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

128
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 D. The supplier of Fire Alarm System shall submit certification of registration of fire alarm issued by BSI
Quality Assurance or equivalent.

16.29 ADRESSESABLE FIRE ALARM PANEL

 Addressable fire alarm panel with loops as required.

 The panel should be housed in an attractive, flame retardant ABS enclosure, utilizing a switch mode
power supply and has a fully removable front cover which improves ease of access for cable installa-
tions.
 Loop Capacity up to 250 devices.
 Color touch screen display.
 Remote monitoring via a desktop PC or smartphone via the cloud.
 Easy to use configuration software.
 Full cause & effect programming via front panel or PC.
 Built‐in TCP‐IP output.
 EN54 parts 2 & 4 FIRE ALARM PANEL Meets all requirements of latest.
 Extensive Day/Night mode programming.
 Built‐in network facility.
 2 programmable local inputs.
 2 sounder circuits.
 Fire & fault relays.

16.29.1 ADDRESSABLE SMOKE AND HEAT DETECTOR

Optical Smoke and Heat Detector in the same sensor (Addressable) including all required fire resistant
cable Smoke and Heat with additional Specs as following:
 The detector is to detect optically dense smoke and Heat, involving materials such as soft furnishings,
PVC, plastic, foam and all similar materials.
 Small Sensor is preferred for visible particles approx. (0.5 to 10μm)
 Should be meet EN54 parts 5, 7 & 17 requirements.
 Remote LED output.
 LEDs for improved, 360° visibility.
 Addressed with dip switches
 The detector should be supported for both (Heat and Smoke) detection.
 Compatible with Panel and supporting its Features.
 Sensor should be with Base.
 Built in Isolator.
 Operating Temperature‐10°C to +50°C and Minimum Continuous Temp. 0°C.
 Coverage 100m².
 IP Rating IP43.

16.29.2 ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER WITH FLASHER

- Sounder and Flasher in one device
- Should be red colored
- Pattern of Flasher W 3.0‐8.9 and the sounder has 17 selective tones minimally
- Complies with EN54 Pt 3 Type A & EN54 Pt 23
- Housed in UL V0 flame retardant ABS Flashing
- Rate 0.5Hz.
- IP Rating IP 21 C.
- Coverage should 3m (D) x 8m(L) x 8m(H) minimum.

16.29.3 RESETTABLE CALL POINT

- Shall be red colored.
- EN54‐11 Visible warning flag confirms activation

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

129
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
 - Complies with EN54‐11.
- Simple key to reset operating element (no broken glass)
- IP Rating IP32 for indoor and at IP65 or higher for outdoor.

16.29.4 FIELD TESTS:

1. Insulation of Cable and Wires: Insulation testing of installed cables and wires shall be made at 500
VDC and the insulation resistance to earth and between conductors of the installed cables and wires
shall be in accordance with listed standards.
2. Earthling: Earth continuity and earth-loop impedance shall be tested to ensure compliance with the
requirements of the listed standards.
3. Commissioning Test: The entire system shall be tested to ensure that it operates satisfactorily and
that:
 The alarm devices comply with the specifications.
 All trigger devices and alarm points function correctly.
 All ancillary equipment functions correctly.
 Any connections to a fire brigade or commercial center operate correctly.

16.30 Earthing system

1. Earthing system and all items shall be according to the local Electrical Authority requirements and reg-
ulations, IEC, BS 7430, BS 7671, and the IEE Wiring regulations.
2. All branch circuit conduit wiring shall include an insulated copper wire for grounding of all non-cur-
rent carrying conductive surfaces of electrical equipment subject to person contact, and for every
electrical outlet.
3. Earthing conductivity test should be conducted so that the resistance not exceeding 5 Ohm.
4. Earth electrode must be provided which consists of 3 driven copper rods 1,8 meter long of standard
type and must be installed as near as possible to the main board. The earth wire has to be copper
conductor as specified making loop connection between the rods and the earth (ground) bus bar, the
distance between each rod and the other have to be at least 7 meters with a checking manhole at
least 60cm depth.
5. Other similar P.V.C. copper conductor has to be bonded to the main water supply pipe from the earth
bus bar.

16.31 Cables Trench Work

A. Cables Routes: The Contractor shall prepare drawings to scale showing the cables routes and method
of installation. He shall draw up diagrams indicating sizes and types. These drawings shall be submit-
ted to the Engineer.
B. The arrangement of the cables and all methods of laying shall be approved by the Engineer and shall
be planned to provide an orderly formation, free from unnecessary bends and crossing, which will
permit the removal of any one cable without undue disturbance to adjacent cables. No joints shall be
allowed in any cable unless approved by the Engineer.
C. The proposed trench route shall be surveyed for the presence of underground cables and/or services
before digging commences.
D. Machine digging shall not be permitted within1 m of suspected cable positions.
E. Lines of trenches shall be kept as straight as possible.
F. Trenches shall have vertical sides supported to avoid subsidence. Where a change in ground level is
necessary, the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually.
G. To ensure that trench bottoms are firm, smooth and free of loose stones and debris, they shall be
lined with approximately 200 mm of sand or other approved material.
H. The trench backfill shall be compacted in layers of a maximum thickness of 200 mm and the surface
reinstated to a condition not inferior to that of the surrounding ground.
I. When excavations for trenches have been accurately executed, notice shall be given by the Contrac-
tor to the Engineer. Laying of cables or building of structures shall not be started until the Contractor
has obtained the Engineer's sanction to proceed with the work.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

130
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
16.32 Excavation and Backfilling
1. The Contractor shall excavate as required for the installation of all underground work under this
heading. Surplus material not needed for backfilling shall be deposited or distributed in the premises
as directed.
2. Trenches shall be of sufficient width and shall be cribbed or braced to prevent cave-in or settlement.
3. Trenches close to walls and columns shall not be excavated without prior consultation with the Engi-
neer, otherwise it will be his representative. Pumping equipment shall be furnished to keep trenches
free of water.
4. Dry earth shall be rammed into place at the sides of conduits and leaving joints and top of conduits
exposed until approved.
5. After approval, all trenches for work installed by the Contractor shall be backfilled by him in 15cmlay-
ers of well-tamped dry sand in a manner to prevent future settlement. Rocks debris, bricks, and like
material shall not be used for backfilling. Where direct burial cable is installed, the trenches shall have
5cm of dry sand on the bottom of trench.
6. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, they shall be reopened to a depth re-
quired for the proper compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the re-
quired grade.
7. As a part of this Contract, all roads, streets, and sidewalks damaged by the installation of building ser-
vices or other work under this heading shall be furnished to the satisfaction of the authorities and reg-
ulations having jurisdiction.
8. Any cutting of new construction which is required for the installation of electrical work after the con-
struction of walls and floor slabs shall be done by the Contractor.
9. Cutting shall be done with extreme care so that the strength of the structure will not be end angered.
Adequate protection shall be provided to prevent damage to adjacent areas. Patching and finishing of
opening shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

16.33 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Shall be comply to NFPA standard.
wall suspension brackets,
Initial filling in brand new cylinder with powder coated finish.
Extinguisher shall be rechargeable
Each dry chemical unit shall be complete with a frame for hanging, to the wall, 36 cm. long hose, dis-
charge valve and pressure gauge.
CO2 extinguishers shall be lightweight aluminium construction
Extinguishers shall have permanent leak proof shut-off safety disc, non-metallic horn, flexible hose
and wall hooks
Foam fire extinguisher shall be Squeeze Grip Cartridge having rating of 34B fitted with gunmetal cap
Maintenance schedules shall be provided with each type of extinguisher

16.34 Existing Equipment

All existing equipment that indicated to be removed shall remain the property of the Owner such equipment
shall be removed by the Contractor and delivered to a point on the project site as designated by the Owner.
Any equipment that the Owner does not desire to retain shall be promptly removed from the Site by the Con-
tractor.
Any existing equipment or material that is to remain in service and is damaged by the Contractor during the
course of the Contract shall be repaired and refinished or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner, at his dis-
cretion.

16.35 List of detailed Standards

BSI - British Standards Institution.
BS - British Standards.
EN - European Standard
BSEN - British Standards implementations of English language versions of European standards.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

131
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
IEE - Institution of Electrical Engineers Wiring Regulations.
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
ISO - International Organization for Standardization
BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations.
BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.
BS 4607 Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations.
IEC 61084/ Cable trunking, fittings, and ducting systems for electrical installations.
BS 1449, BSEN 10143, BS 4678 Part 1 and 2, and IEC 61084/BS4675 Part 4 Cable trunking and fittings
BS 1442 Specification for galvanized mild steel wire for armored cable.
BS 4109 Specification for copper for electrical purposes.
BS 5308 Instrumentation Cables
BS 5467 Specification for cables with thermo-setting insulation.
BS 6004 Specification for PVC insulated cables (non-armored) for electric power and lighting.
BS 6007 specifies for rubber-insulated cables for electric power and lighting.
BS 6081 specifies for terminations for mineral insulated cables.
BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands.
BS 6207 specifies for mineral insulated copper-sheathed cables with copper conductors.
BS 6234 specifies for polyethylene insulation and sheath of electric cables.
BS 6053 specifies conduits outside diameters for electrical installations and threads for conduits and fittings.
BS 6099 Conduits for electrical installations.
BS 6220 specifies for junction boxes for use in electrical installations.
BS 6346 specifies for PVC insulated cables for electricity supply.
BS 6360 specifies for conductors in insulated cables and cords.
BS 6469 Methods of test for insulation and sheaths of electric cables
BS 6500 specifies for insulated flexible cords and cables.
BS 6746 specifies for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
BS 1363 Socket outlets rated.
BS 5733 Electrical Connection Box.
IEC 60439/BS5486 Distribution boards shall be of the totally enclosed metal clad pattern.
FCC, UL-LISTED, CE, TUV, ROHS, LM79, LM80 Lighting devices Standard and tests must comply.
BSI/IEC 598-2-22 Emergency Lights and Exit Signs.
EN54‐11. Visible warning flag confirms activation.
EN54 Pt 3 Type A & EN54 Pt 23 Addressable Sounder with Flasher.
EN54 parts 5, 7 & 17 Small Sensor is preferred for visible particles approx. (0.5 to 10μm).
EN54 parts 2 & 4, Fire Alarm Panel must meet all requirements of latest.
BS 5445 Components of automatic fire detectors system.
BS 5446 Components of automatic fire alarm systems for residential purposes.
BS 5839 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems for Buildings.
IEC 60364 Electrical installation of buildings.
IEC 609471/BSEN 60947: Part 1 Switching devices,
IEE - BS 7671 - IEC 60365-5-54 table 54.7 the size of conductor.
IEC 60502 specifies the construction, dimensions, and test requirements of power cables
IEC 60227 specifies the rigid and flexible cables with insulation, and sheath
BSEN 60898 / IEC 60898 Circuit breaker for overcurrent protection,
IEE Wiring Regulations 18th edition Section 547 Supplementary, Equi-Potential bonding conductors
IEE Wiring Regulations 18th edition Section 713-11 Earthing resistance tests.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

132
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
17. Health and Safety Management

17.1 Health & safety requirements

The Contractor’s engineer shall prepare a Health and Safety Plan and shall include all matters related to con-
struction site health and safety. Responsibility and liabilities lie with the HS Officer and the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all workmen and other persons entering the Works and
shall, at his own expense (where not otherwise stated) take all measures necessary to ensure their safety.
Provision of proper safety and emergency regulations include fire, gas (if any) and electric shock prevention,
stretchers and first aid boxes, together with rescue facilities generally, for each place of working.
Notices written in relevant languages (Arabic and English) shall be erected at points likely to be used by the
public and warning the public of the existence of the Works. These notices shall be in addition to any statutory
requirements.
Personal protective equipment shall be available and used by the personnel including: safety helmet, eye pro-
tection, ear protection, hand protection, foot protection, harnesses and belts. In addition, all scaffolds must be
secure and strong enough to handle the weight of the workers and equipment with a considerable margin of
safety that takes into account the load of wind. All scaffolds much be equipped with strong guardrails.
Provision and maintenance of suitable lighting to provide adequate illumination of the Works with appropriate
spares and standby equipment.
Provision of good and safe access to any part of the Works.

17.2 Construction Safety

The contractor shall take all necessary steps to provide safety for project workers, the persons residing near
the project, to the property of the public or others from the project activities arising as a consequence of his
methods of operation.
The Contractor shall comply with all Safety Legislations and its Subsidiary Legislations, Regulations which are in
force in the Country and any amendments or re-enactments.
The Contractor shall not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted
principles of safe and sound practices. The Contractor shall ensure safe environment on site at all times.
The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his workmen when
safety provisions are used.

17.3 Barricading

The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards, fences or barriers around excavations, pits or other similar
potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The barricade should be at least 1.1m high and strong enough
to withstand a lateral point load of 50 kg.

17.4 Warning Signs

The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900 mm x 600 mm at a minimum of 4 points around the pe-
riphery of the site where the construction activities are located in near the residential area, roads, at locations
where there is a chance of children can come to work site and where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs
shall have the words "DANGER - KEEP OUT OF SITE".

17.5 Storage Of Fuels

Fuels shall be stored in a room/ enclosed space, the room/ enclosed space shall have impervious platform and
berm along the periphery of the storage area to contain spills of the fuels.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

133
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor
17.6 Safety Of Machinery

The Contractor shall employ only qualified operators for the machinery to be used on Site. All the machinery
shall be locked when they are parked to avoid unauthorized operation of the machinery.

17.7 First Aid

At least two first aid kits shall be kept at site for attending the emergency treatment to the victims of accidents
or chemical poisoning or excessive exposure to toxic substances. The first aid kit shall include a leaflet of stan-
dard First-Aid procedure in addition to the medicines and medical tools. At least one staff member who has
undergone First Aid training should be posted at site.

17.8 Fire Safety, Emergency And Rescue

The Contractor shall establish Fire Safety, Emergency and Rescue arrangements to contain fire and take neces-
sary action during emergency. The contractor should place fire extinguishers at the work site, materials stor-
age area and at site accommodation. The contractor should keep minimum 6 fire extinguishers within the
workplace. Coordination with the Civil Defense is necessary to ensure prompt response in the event of fire.

In addition, dispatchable fire exit means must be provided during operations on the site. At any point of imple-
mentation, multiple exit means must be available. These include temporary stairways and/or dispatchable lad-
ders for workers to use as exit means.

17.9 Electrical Safety

All electrical l equip should be listed and labeled, free from hazards, and used in the proper manner.
The electrician should be protected from electrical shocks and provided necessary safety equipment.
All temporary electrical installations in the site should be verified regularly to ensure that all the leaks in the
wires are rectified/ faulty wires are replaced. The contractor should also ensure that all electric joints are leak
proof.

17.10 Personal Protective Equipment

The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment for all workmen employed
on the site to provide protection against falling objects and harmful substances which can cause injury. The
Personal protective equipment shall include boots, hand gloves, helmet and goggles. The Contractor shall
record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen and kept in the site office.

17.11 Housekeeping

The Contractor shall provide safe working environment by keeping the site neat and tidy, and free from debris.
All materials shall be stacked safely. All accesses shall be kept free from hazards and debris.
Housekeeping shall be carried out in such a manner and at such times so as not to cause any inconvenience to
either the adjoining owners, occupiers or the public. Debris shall be wetted to minimize the risk of dust. Con-
tainers for debris, rubbish and other wastes shall be provided at the designated places.

Technical Specifications- Civil, Architectural, and Electrical Works

134
for Rehabilitation of Admin Building in Fishery Harbor